WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

 

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Notes

Optical Instruments

Optical Instruments Notes:The human eye is a perfect natural optical instrument that is more complex and versatile compared to any man-made optical instrument It may be compared to a camera. If an object is placed in front of a camera, its image is produced in the photographic plate of the camera. Similarly, if an object is placed before a human eye, its image is formed on the screen of the eye Le. retina The different parts of the eye are discussed below

1. Description:

The nearly spherical part of the human eye is called the eyeball. It can move in the eye socket with the help of a few muscles. A brief description of parts of the eyeball which are relevant to our discussion is given below.

Cornea:

It is transparent and its curvature is greater than other portions. Light enters the eye through it Its refractive index is about 1.33

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Structure Of Human Eye

Aqueous humour:

It is a transparent watery liquid. It acts as the refracting medium of light and occupies the space between the cornea and the eye lens. Its refractive index is

Iris- It is a contractile diaphragm with a circular aperture near the center. It is made up of two types of muscles. These two muscles contract the iris and control the intensity of the incoming light. The function of the iris is to adjust and admit a suitable quantity of light to enter the eye through the pupil.

Pupil:

It is a circular aperture at the center of the iris. Through this, light enters the eye. According to the intensity of the incoming light, iris can make the pupil small or large and thus adjust the intensity of the incoming light.

Optical Instruments Notes

Eye lens:

It is a transparent system resembling a double convex lens, being more convex behind than in front. It is suspended behind the iris by some ligaments. The function of the lens is to form real and inverted images of external objects on the retina. The refractive indices of the material of the different pans of the lens are not equal. The average refractive index of the materials is about 1.45.

Suspensory ligament: These ligaments confine the eye lens to the right position.

Ciliary muscle:

These muscles adjust the curvature of eye lens and hence the focal length of the eye lens is changed. By adjusting the focal length of the eye lens we help to form the images of the distant objects unknowingly.

 Vitreous humor:

It is a viscous liquid. It acts as the refracting medium of light and occupies the space between the lens and the retina. Its refractive index is about 1.33

Retina:

It is a semi-transparent sensitive membrane of fibers forming the inner coating of the eyeball. The optic nerves terminate at this membrane and carry the sensation of sight to the brain as soon as an image of any external object Is formed on it

Yellow spot:

In the middle of the rain, there is a portion of diameter 2 mm called the yellow spot. This portion of the retina takes the most effective part in understanding the color and details of the object At the center of the yellow spot there is a circular portion of diameter 0.3 mm. It is known as fovea centralis. This is the most sensitive part of the certain. If The image of an object is formed on fovea centrails it is seen most distinctly.

So the adjusting muscles of the eye always try to cast the image of the fovea centralis. To observe by fovea centralis is on an object on called direct vision and to observe by other portions of the retina is called indirect vision.

Blind Spot:

The least sensitive part of the retina is known as blind spot. If the image of an object is formed at this place it is not visible.

Visual axis and optic axis:

The line joining the center of the cornea and that of the lens is called the optic axis of the eye. The line joining the center of the lens and the fovea centralis is called the visual axis of the eye. The angle between the optic axis and the visual axis ranges from 5° to 7°

2. The function of the eye:

The cornea, aqueous humor, and the lens form a single convex lens with air on one side and vitreous humor on the other. For a normal eye, the focal length of the combination is such that distant objects are focused on the retina.

Rays from external objects enter the eye and undergo a series of refractions at the cornea, aqueous humor, successive layers of the lens, and vitreous humor, and finally form a real, inverted, and diminished image on the retina. Though the image on the retina is inverted the brain intercepts it as If in the erect position.

With the help of the suspensory ligament, the ciliary muscle changes the focal length of the eye lens in such a way that the image of an object is constructed exactly on the retina. So we can clearly observe an object, irrespective of its position

Accommodation of the Eye

For a normal eye, the focal length of the eye lens is such that objects situated at large distances are focused on the retina. In this situation, the value of the focal length of the eye lens is maximum. This focusing is done by the eye by altering the curvature of the lens caused by a change in the tension in the ciliary muscles of the eye lens.

When the eye is in a state of full relaxation, distant objects are focused on the retina. But as the objects towards the eye, the muscles are put to tension to bring back the image on the retina behind the retina

The involuntary process by which the eye adapts its focal length to see objects at all distances is called accommodation. Accommodation power of eye is limited. Due to accommodation, one can see an object clearly up to a distance of 25 cm from his/ her eye. We can also clearly see objects which are very near to us.

Optical Instruments Notes

For example, we can clearly read a book at a small distance from our eyes. But if we bring the book at a distance less than 25 cm from our eyes, then we will not be able to read the book. If we try to read a book in this situation for longer we will feel pain in our eyes.

1. Near point:

It is the nearest position of the object in front of a normal eye up to which the object can be seen distinctly without accommodation. This shortest distance at which an object can be seen distinctly is called the least distance of distinct vision. For a normal eye, this distance is about 25 The process of accommodation cannot function for the normal eye when the object is situated at a distance less than 25 cm from the eye.

2. Far point:

It is the farthest point up to which an object can be distinctly seen without accommodation. For a normal eye the far point is at infinity. The distance between the near point and the far point is called the range of vision. With the help of accommodation, a normal eye can see objects situated within this range of vision.

Adaptation of Eye

It has been said earlier that the circular aperture at the center of the iris is a pupil. With the help of some muscles, Iris can make the pupil small or large and thus adjust the intensity of the incoming light. In the presence of powerful light, the pupil automatically becomes small and in the presence of dim light, it becomes large. The increase or decrease in the size of the pupil according to need is called adaptation.

If the light is suddenly extinguished at night In a lighted do not see anything in the room we room momentarily. The reason is that if light, the pupil of the eye remains small. S owly with time the pupil adapts Itself to the darkness, becomes larger in size and we are able to discern the furniture and other objects in the room. Similarly, in a dark place, the pupil remains large. So when we suddenly come to a lighted place from a dark one, too much light enters the eye at a time and we are unable to see anything

But after some time the pupil automatically becomes small and adjusts the amount of incoming light. So we can see everything distinctly. So, if the intensity of incident light on the eye changes then instantaneously, an adaptation of eye takes place and the above two incidents are observed.

Persistence of Vision

The retina of the eye continues to bear the effect of light after the stimulus has been taken away. This phenomenon is called the persistence of vision. The interval for which the impressions continue is about \(\frac{1}{10}\) of a second. So if two different incidents occur before our eyes within \(\frac{1}{10}\) of a second, we cannot differentiate them. We think that a single incident has happened. This is due to the persistence of vision. For this reason, we cannot separately visualize the blades of a revolving electric fan.

Optical Instruments Notes

In different times blades are in different positions, but it seems that the motion of the blades is continuous. For the same reason, the glowing end of a splinter or match-stick yields a bright circular track when the former is swung around and not bright points changing their positions in a discontinuous manner

In this context, it needs to be mentioned that we can view movies because of the persistence of vision. Numerous still pictures of the same thing taken at short intervals, when moved rapidly within \(\frac{1}{10}\) second before the projector, the discontinuous images fuse together to produce an illusion of continuity

Advantage of two eyes

When we look at an object with our two eyes, we see a single object instead of two. On the retina, two images are indeed formed by the two eye lenses. But the brain blends the two different images into a single one. As the two eyes are located a little distance apart, we see an object from two different sides. With the right eye, we see the front side along with a portion of the right side of the object, similarly with the left eye we see the front side along with a portion of the left side of the object.

This perception of the formation of the two images on the retinas of the two eye lenses creates a single perception in the brain. So we get the three-dimensional idea of the object. The perception of viewing a three-dimensional image of an object with the help of our two eyes is called binocular or stereoscopic vision. We estimate the distance of the different objects from our eyes and understand the actual positions of an object with the help of two eyes. Fitting thread in a needle hole is a difficult task. One eye closed. As it is difficult to visualize the distance of the needle hole and the end of the thread from our eye.

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Defects Of Vision And Theip Reme – Dies

We know that the range of vision of a normal eye extends from 25 cm from the eye to infinity i.e., if an object is situated anywhere within this long range, its image is formed on the retina. If the range of vision of an eye is less than this normal range the eye is said to be defective.

Optical Instruments Notes

The different defects of vision are stated below:

  1. Long sight or hypermetropia
  2. Short sight or myopia
  3. Presbyopia
  4. Astigmatism

The nature of these defects and the processes of their removal are discussed below

1. Long sight or hypermetropia:

It is the defect of the eye due to which we cannot see the near objects distinctly.

The defect is attributed to either of the two causes:

  1. The eyeball has become too short.
  2. The focal length of the eye lens has become too long.

The power of accommodation of an eye has a certain limit. For a normal eye, the near point is 25 cm. But for a long-sighted eye is greater than 25 cm i.e., objects situated more than 25

Suppose, the point N is the near point of a normal eye. For the defect of long sight, the image of an object situated at N will be formed behind the retina instead of being formed on the retina causing blurring of the image. For him, the near point is situated at N’. So, for this defect, the least distance of distinct vision is more than 25 cm

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Long Sight Or Hypermetropia

Optical Instruments Notes

Remedy:

This defect can be removed by placing a convex lens of suitable focal length in front of the eye. The focal length of the convex lens is such that the light rays starting from the object at N appear to come from N’ after refraction in the lens. So N’ is the virtual image of the object at N.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Remedy

If D be the least distance of distinct vision for the normal eye and d be the corresponding distance for the long-sighted eye, then the focal length/ of the convex lens placed in front of the eye is given by (from the equation of lens)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

[Here , u = D, v= -d]

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-d}-\frac{1}{-D}=\frac{1}{f} \quad \text { or, } \frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{25}-\frac{1}{d}\)

Or, f = \(\frac{25 d}{d-25} \mathrm{~cm}\)

[d<25 f is positive ]

The power of that convex lens

= \(\frac{100}{f}=\frac{100}{25 d}(d-25)\)

Or, 4 \(-\frac{100}{d}\)

So long sight can be corrected by using spectacles having convex lenses. As the focal length of convex lens is positive its power is also positive which is why the power of the spectacles is obviously positive.

2. Short sight or myopia:

It is the defect of the eye which; sees near objects1but not the distant objects distinctly.

Optical Instruments Notes

The cause of this defect may be either:

  1. The eyeball has become a little bit elongated or
  2. The focal length of the eye lens has become too short.

For these reasons, the image of a distant object is formed not exactly on the retina, but at a point C in front of it Applying the power of accommodation the image cannot be focussed on the retina So the far point of this short-sighted eye does not remain at infinity but comes nearest to eye i.e, the distance of the air far point of this eye is shorter than that of the normal eye.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Short Sight Or Myopia

Suppose, F is the far point of a short-sighted eye i.e., if the object is situated at F the eye lens forms its image on the retina. Of course, the near point of this eye remains unchanged, i.e., the least distance of distinct vision of a short-sighted eye remains 25 cm

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Short Sight Eye

So a short-sighted eye does not see distinctly the objects from infinity up to F but can see nearer objects distinctly.

Remedy:

In order to correct the defect, a concave lens of suitable focal length should be used. From this, it is seen that the parallel rays from distant objects are focussed at C in front of the retina.

So to focus the rays on the retina, the point of convergence should be shifted to a further point such that the virtual image of the distant object is brought to the far point F, This is possible when the focal length of the lens is equal to the distance of the far point F, as shown below.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Remedy.

Optical Instruments Notes

Suppose, the distance of the far point is d and the focal length of the lens L is f. In this case, object distance u = ∞  and image distance v = d

So from equation  \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\), we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-d}-\frac{1}{∞}=\frac{1}{f}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}\) = \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{-d}\)

Or, f = -d

Optical Instruments Notes

Power of the concave lens.

P= \(\frac{100}{f}\)

P= \(\frac{-100}{d}\) dioptre

So, for remedy of short, the spectacles to be should have a concave lens of focal length equal to the distance of the far point. The focal length of a concave lens is negative. so its power is negative. hence a person having the defect of short sight should use spectacles having negative power.

Sometimes it is difficult to use high-power concave lenses in spectacles. In this case, the far point is bought from infinity to a relatively nearer point of distance d’. If the focal length of lens is f’ in this case, then

Presbyopia:

With the advancement of age, the muscles of the eye lose their elasticity. Hence, the normal power of accommodation of the eye decreases. As a result the least distance of distinct vision increases. So nearer objects are not visible distinctly. This defect is called presbyopia. For remedy of this defect convex less suitable focal length is to be used. Hoxx’exer, far point of the eyre having presbyopia is normal i.e., at infinity.

Again sometimes, die far point of the defective eye comes nearer them infinity. To see distant objects concave lens is to be used. To remove both defects, a convex and a concave lens are used together in a circular framing. Distant objects are seen by the concave lens and nearer objects by the dying convex lens. This type of lens is called a bifocal lens

Again sometimes, die far point of the defective eye comes nearer them infinity. To see distant objects concave lens is to be used. To remove both defects, a convex and a concave lens are used together in a circular framing. Distant objects are seen by the concave lens and nearer objects by the die convex lens This type of lens is called the bifocal lens.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Biofocal Lens

Astigmatism:

It is an optical defect in which vision becomes blurred along different axes. It is due to the inability of the eye to focus a point object lying in different directions into a sharply focused image on the? retina.

While a normal eye can sec equally distinctly vertical and horizontal lines drawn in a plane an eye having astigmatism does not see all the lines with the same distinctness. A few sets of three parallel lines are drawn inclined at different angles. An eye with astigmatism cannot isolate all of them with the same distinctness.

This defect is due to the unequal curvature of the vertical and horizontal sections of the cornea and is remedied by using cylindrical or sphere cylindrical lenses In order to vary the focal length in one plane. The lenses so used are often called toric lenses.

Optical Instruments Notes

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Toric Lens

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Defects Of Vision And Theip Reme – Dies Numerical Examples

Example 1. A person having a long slglit cannot see things distinctly at a distance of less than 40 cm. If he wants to see things situated 25 cm from him, what should be the power of his spectacles?
Solution:

Let the focal length of the lens of the spectacles =. Here the power of the spectacles will be such that if an object is situated at a distance of 25 cm its virtual image will be formed at a distance of 40 cm from die eye i.e., u = 25 cm; v = 40 cm; both u and v are negative.

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-40}-\frac{1}{-25}=\frac{1}{f} \)

Or, \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{8-5}{200}=\frac{3}{200}\)

f = \(\frac{200}{3}\) cm

∴ Power of the lens of the spectacles

P = \(\frac{100}{f}\)

Or, \(100 \times \frac{3}{200}\)

= 1.5 m1

= 1.5 D

[Short solution: distance of near point d, = 40 cm

∴ Power of the lens, P= 4 – \(\) = 4 – 2.5 = 1.5 made

As power is positive, the lens is a convex lens.]

Example 2. A short-sighted person can see distinctly the object situated at a distance of 20 cm from him. What type of lens will he use to see the objects situated at a distance of 100 cm from him? What will be the power of the lens?
Solution:

In this case, a lens is to be used to form the image of the objects situated at a distance of 100 cm at 20 cm from the eye i.e., u = -100 cm; v = 20 cm; u and v are both negative

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-20}-\frac{1}{-100}=\frac{1}{f}\) Or, \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{-5+1}{100}=-\frac{1}{25}\)

Or, f = -25 cm

So, a concave lens of focal length 25 cm is to be used.

Power of the lens, P = \(\frac{100}{f}=\frac{100}{-25}\)= -4D

Optical Instruments Notes

[Short solution: distance of a far point, d = 20cm

After using the lens distance of the far point, d’ = 100cm

∴ Power of lens, P = \(\frac{100}{d^{\prime}}-\frac{100}{d}=\frac{100}{100}-\frac{100}{20}=-4 \mathrm{D}\)

Since power is negative, the lens is a concave lens

Example 3. A short-sighted person can read a book only up to 15 cm from his eyes. To read a book placed at a distance of 25 cm from him what type of spectacles should he use? What will be the power of the spectacles
Solution:

In this case, a lens is to be used which will form the image of the objects situated at a distance of 25 cm at 15 cm from the man. i.e., u = 25 cm, v = 15 cm, u and v are both positive.

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{15}-\frac{1}{25}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{5-3}{75}=\frac{2}{75}\)

Or, f = \(\frac{75}{2}\)

= 37. 5 cm

So the lens to be used is a concave lens of focal length 37.5

Power of the lens

P = \(\frac{-100}{f}=\frac{-100}{75} \times 2\)

= \(\frac{-8}{3}\)

= – 2.67 dioptre.

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 4. A person can see distinctly up to a distance of 2 no further. To see distinctly up to a long distance what type of spectacles should he use? What will be the of the lens of the spectacles?
Solution:

As the person can see distinctly up to a distance of the defect of the eye is short sight, so to see distinctly up to cave lens. The focal length is 2 m, a long distance he will have to use con of the lens will be such that the image of the objects at infinity will be formed at a distance of 2 m from the eye i.e., u= ∞ ,

v= -2, m = -200 cm (negative)

Suppose the focal length of the lens = f

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-200}-\frac{1}{\infty}=\frac{1}{f}\)

f = -200cm.

∴ Power of the lens

P = \(\frac{100}{f}=\frac{100}{-200}\)

= 0.5 m

Example 5. A person with spectacles of power 3 m-1 can see distinctly the letters of a newspaper placed at a distance of 25 cm from the eye. At what distance should the newspaper be kept to be able to read It without spectacles
Solution:

The power of the lens of the spectacles = 3 m 1. If f is the focal length of the lens, then

3 = \(\frac{100}{f}\) f = \(\frac{100}{3}\)cm.

Again u = -25cm and f = \(\frac{100}{3}\) cm.

So from the equation

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒  \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{25}=\frac{3}{100}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{3}{100}-\frac{1}{25}\)

Or, v = – 100 cm

So to read a paper without spectacles the person will have to place it at a distance of 100 cm from the eye

Example 6. A person can see distinctly any object situated in between the distance 50 cm and 300 cm. What type of spectacles are to be used 

  1. To extend the far point up to infinity and
  2. To bring the least distance of distinct vision in each pair of spectacles

Solution:

To extend the far point from 300 cin to infinity a concave lens is. Since the far point of the defective eye is 300 cm, the focal length of the concave lens of the spectacles will be 300 cm. Because the parallel rays coming from infinity ‘after refraction by the concave lens appear to diverge from a point at a distance of 300 cm from the lens. With these spectacles, the near point of the range of vision will be that object distance for which the image distance is 50 cm.

Here, v = -50 cm and f = -300 cm

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(-\frac{1}{50}-\frac{1}{u}=-\frac{1}{300}\)

Or, \(-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{50}-\frac{1}{300}=\frac{1}{60}\)

Or, u= – 60 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

So with this pair of spectacles, the range of vision will be from 60 cm up to infinity.

To bring the near point to 25 cm from 50 cm spectacles with a convex lens are to be used. Here, u = -25 cm and v = -50 cm.

So from the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=-\frac{1}{50}-\frac{1}{-25}=\frac{1}{50}\)

Or,\(\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{-300}-\frac{1}{50}=-\frac{7}{300}\)

To find out the far point v = -300cm, f= 50 cm, u=?

In this case, the range of vision of the man extends from 25 cm to 42.86 cm.

Example 7.  A person using spectacles having power + 2.5 m-1 sees the objects distinctly at a distance of 25 cm. What is the nearest point for the person? What type of defect of vision does the eye have
Solution:

Power of spectacles, P = + 2.5 m-1 If f be the focal length of the lens of the spectacles, then

P = \(\frac{100}{f}\) , Or, f = \(\frac{100}{2.5}\)

= 40 cm

Suppose, the distance of the near point, of, the defective eye = x cm

The lens will form the image of the object situated at a distance of 25 cm at a distance.

Here, u = -25 cm; v m’rx cm and/ = 40 cm

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-x}-\frac{1}{-25}=\frac{1}{40}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{x}=\frac{1}{25}-\frac{1}{40}=\frac{3}{200}\)

Or, x = \(\frac{200}{3}\)

= 66.67 cm

This is the distance of the near point for the person i.e., the near point has been shifted away from a normal distance (25 cm). So the defect of the eye is long sight.

Example 8.  A person with defective eyes can see objects distinctly up to a distance of 20 cm. What type of lens? should be used and of what power? From the equation
Solution:

The far point of the defective eyes is 20 cm i.e., under this condition the focal length of the convex lens of the eye, f1 = 20 cm. An external lens of focal length f2 is to be used with the eye lens to shift the far point to infinity. The meaning of the far point at infinity is that the focal length of the combination of the eye lens and external lens, F = oo we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{F}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{\infty}=\frac{1}{20}+\frac{1}{f_2}\)

f1 = – 20 cm

Since f2 is negative, the external lens is a concave one. its power,

P = \(\frac{100}{f_2}=-\frac{100}{20}\)

Example 9. A boy can clearly see objects between a distance of 15cm to 200cm from his eye. To clearly see an object situated at infinity, what will be the power of the lens that should he use? If he wears that lens then what will be the least distance of distinct vision in that case?
Solution:

To see an object placed at infinity, the focal length of the lens should be such that parallel rays coming from infinity seem to be coming from a point at a distance of 200cm

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-200}-\frac{1}{\infty}=\frac{1}{f}\)

f = – 200 cm

As f is negative, the lens is concave.

Power of the leaf , P = \(\frac{100}{f}\)

= \(\frac{100}{-200}\)

= – 0.5m

Optical Instruments Notes

Let, while he is wearing spectacles, the least distance of distinct vision = u

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-15}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{-200}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{u}=-\frac{1}{15}+\frac{1}{200}\)

= \(\frac{-40+3}{600}=-\frac{37}{600}\)

Or, u = – \(\frac{600}{37}\)

= -16.22 cm.

Hence, the required distance is 16.22

Example 10.  A long-sighted man can clearly see at any distance beyond 2.5m. What kind of lens In his spectacles does require to rent books placed 25cm from his eyes?
Solution:

Let the focal length of the spectacles be f.

Now, if an object is placed 25 cm from the eye then the virtual

The image will be created at a distance of 250cm from the eye

Hence, u = -25cm , v = -2.5m = -250cm

From the equation \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we get

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-250}-\frac{1}{-25}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Or, f = \(\frac{250}{9}\)

= 27.78.cm

So that person should use the convex lens of focal length 27.78cm.

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments, Optical Instruments, Visual Angle, And Angular Magnification

Optical instruments:

Optical instruments which include magnifying glasses, microscopes, telescopes, etc. are used as aids to vision for clarity and magnification.

Visual, angle:

When the size of the image on the retina, the bigger,is the apparent size of the object to us. The angle subtended by the object at the eye is known as the visual angle. The larger the visual angle, the larger is the size of the image. So the apparent size of the object is determined by the visual angle.

A and B are the two different positions of an object. Suppose the visual angles subtended at the eye are θA and θB at these points. Now, according to the object looks smaller at A than at B. For example, cars and human beings look very small on the roof of a high-rise building. Again if the two objects A and C of different heights subtend equal angles at the eye they Will Appear

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Visual Angle

As the object approaches the eye, the visual angle increases. So the apparent size of the object also increases. When the object is placed at the near point the apparent size becomes as great as possible. If the object is nearer to the eye than its near point, the impression on the retina is large but indistinct. So, there is a limit to the distance to which an object can be brought near to the eye. An instrument just removes these shortcomings.

Angular magnification or magnifying power: The magnifying power of a visual instrument is the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by the image to the angle subtended at the eye by the object. This magnifying power of a visual instrument is called angular magnification.

Angular magnification angle subtended at the eye by the image angle subtended at the eye by the object

It is to be noted that there is a difference between linear magnification (vide the chapter on lens) and the so-called angular magnification in the case of visual instruments. Linear magnification is unnecessary in visual instruments. Because in these instruments instead of the real size of the image, its apparent size is considered example, in a telescope the size of the image of a distant object is much smaller than the real size of the object. In spite of that, the image looks large enough because its visual angle is generally large of the same height.

The size of the sun is much larger than that of the moon. But these two appear of the same size as they subtend equal visual angles at our eyes.

As the object approaches the eye, the visual angle increases. So the apparent size of the object also increases. When the object is placed at the near point the apparent size becomes as great as possible. If the object is nearer to the eye than its near point, the impression on the retina is large but indistinct. So, there is a limit to the distance to which an object can be brought near to the eye. An instrument just removes these shortcomings

Angular magnification or magnifying power

The magnifying power of a visual instrument is the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by the image to the angle subtended at the eye by the object.

This magnifying power of a visual instrument is called angular magnification.

Optical Instruments Notes

Angular magnification

= \(\frac{\text { angle subtended at eye by the image }}{\text { angle subtended at eye by the object }}\)

It is to be noted that there is a difference between linear magnification (vide the chapter on lens) and the so-called angular magnification in the case of visual instruments. Linear magnification is unnecessary in visual instruments.

Because in these instruments instead of the real size of the image its apparent size is considered e.g., in a telescope the size of the image of a distant object is much smaller than the real size of the object. In spite of that, the image looks large enough because its visual angle is generally large.

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Microscope

The instrument helps us see very small objects, which are otherwise not visible to the naked eye. It is of two types

  1. A simple microscope or magnifying glass and
  2. Compound microscope.

1. Simple Microscope or Magnifying Glass:

Description and working principle: A simple microscope or a magnifying glass is actually a convex lens of short focal length. We know that if an object is placed within the focal length of a convex lens then an erect, virtual, and magnified image is formed at the same side where the object is placed.

L is a convex lens. Object PQ is placed perpendicular to the principal axis within the focal length of the lens. In this case, a virtual, erect, and magnified image pq is formed which will be seen by an eye placed close behind the lens. The distance of the object from the lens is so adjusted that the image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision (D = 25 cm) from the eye.

Magnification:

In the object, PQ is placed such that its image pq is formed at the least distance of distinct vision. If the lens is thin and the eye is placed very close to the lens then the visual angle β will be given by

β = ∠p1Oq = tan ∠p1Oq = \(\frac{p q}{O q}\)

Since β is very small, tan β = β]

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Simple Microscope Or Magnifying Glass

Now, to observe the object distinctly without a lens it must be kept at the least distance of distinct vision i.e., at P1 q. In that case, if the object subtends the visual angle at the eye, then

= ∠pOq = tan ∠pOq = \(\frac{P_1 q}{O q}\)

Angular magnification, the angle subtended by the

m = \(\frac{\text { image placed at the near point }}{\text { angle subtended by the object placed at the near point }}\)

= \(\frac{\beta}{\alpha}=\frac{\frac{p q}{O q}}{\frac{P_1 q}{O q}}=\frac{p q}{P_1 q}\)

= \(\frac{p q}{P Q}=\frac{O q}{O Q}\)

= \(\frac{D}{u}\) = linear magnification of the lens ……………….(1)

[D = least distance of distinct vision or the image distance and u = object distance]

From the equation of the lens, we have,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \text { or, } \frac{D}{-v}-\frac{D}{-u}=\frac{D}{f}\) ……………….(2)

[Here D and v are negative and f is positive]

⇒ \(\frac{D}{u}=\frac{D}{v}+\frac{D}{f}\)

= \(\frac{D}{u}=\frac{D}{v}+\frac{D}{f}\) ……………..(3)

Hence, it is observed that the value of magnification is not constant Magnification depends on the image distance.

If an image is formed at a near point, in that case, v = D

Optical Instruments Notes

Magnification:

m = \(\frac{D}{D}+\frac{D}{f}=1+\frac{D}{f}\) …………….(4)

If an image is formed at infinity, in that case, v = 00

⇒ \(\frac{D}{\infty}+\frac{D}{f}=\frac{D}{f}\) …………….(5)

Maximum value of m = 1+ \(\frac{D}{f}\) and minimum value of m = \(\frac{D}{f}\)

Hence according to the position of image, the magnification lies between (1+\(\frac{D}{f}\) ) and \(\frac{D}{f}\)

For maximum magnification image forms at a near point.

For normal. eye D is equal to 25 cm. In that case,

m = 1+ \(\frac{25}{f}\)

But D is not equal to 25cm for all. So, for different observers, the magnifying power of the same microscope may be different. that magnification may be by diminishing the focal length although not decreasing it much. In that case, the lens will be very thick and the image will be indistinct and distorted. Hence, the magnification of a simple microscope is limited.

Uses:  A magnifying glass is used by

  1. Persons suffering from presbyopia to read small letters,
  2. Biology students to see specimen slides,
  3. Watch repairers to locate defects
  4. Detective department to match fingerprints.

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Microscope Numerical Examples

Example 1. If an object is placed at a distance of 5 cm from a convex lens, a real image of the object is formed at a distance of 20 cm from the lens. If the lens is used as a magnifying glass what maximum magnification can be obtained from it? Least distance of distinct vision is 24 cm
Solution:

Here u = -5 cm and v = 20 cm.

If f is the focal length of the lens we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{20}-\frac{1}{-5}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Or, f = 4 cm

So, the focal length of the lens is 4 cm.

Maximum magnification of the magnifying glass

m = \(1+\frac{D}{f}\)

= \(1+\frac{24}{4}\)

= 7

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 2. A watch repairer kept a magnifying glass very close to his eyes and found that the magnifying power of the glass was θ. If the least distance of distinct vision of the eye is 25 cm, calculate the focal length of the lens.
Solution:

Here m = 8 and D = 25 cm

m = \(1+\frac{D}{f}\)

Or, 8 =\(1+\frac{25}{f}\)

f = \(\frac{25}{f}\)

= 3.57 cm

Example 3. A convex lens of power 10 m-1 Is used as a simple magnifying glass. What is the maximum and minimum magnification of the lens?

Power of a lens,

P = \(\frac{100}{f}\) or,= f \(\frac{100}{p}\)

In this case, P = 10 m-1

f  = \(\frac{100}{10}\)  = 10 cm

Maximum magnification = \(1+\frac{D}{f}=1+\frac{25}{10}\)

= 3.5

Maximum magnification =\(\frac{D}{f}=\frac{25}{10}\)

= 2.5

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Compound Microscope

The magnification produced by a simple microscope is limited. If the object is very small, a simple microscope cannot sufficiently magnify it. For larger magnification compound microscope is to be used. Galileo invented this instrument in the seventeenth century.

1. Description:

In this instrument, two convex lenses of short focal lengths are placed in a tube at a certain distance apart so as to have a common axis. The convex lens O which faces the object to be viewed is known as the objective. The other lens E near the eye is known as the eyepiece. The objective has a smaller focal length and aperture than those of the eyepiece. The tube with the lenses can be moved parallel to the axis towards the object or away from it. There is an arrangement to change the distance between the objective and the eyepiece.

2. Working principle:

Illustrates the working principle of the compound microscope. Fo and Fg are the foci of the objective and the eyepiece.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Work Principle Of Eyepiece

PQ is a small object. The distance from O is slightly greater than OFo. The objective forms a real, inverted and

Magnified image P1Q1 in front of the eyepiece. The position of the eyepiece Is such that the image P1Q1 formed within its first principal focus Fe. P1Q1 acts as an object to the eyepiece and it forms a magnified virtual image pq of P1Q1.

Optical Instruments Notes

This pq is the final image which is virtual. Inverted and magnified with respect to the object. The distance between the objective and the eyepiece is so adjusted that the final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision from the eye. This process is called focussing of the microscope. In this case, a highly magnified image is seen without any strain in the eye. The magnification becomes maximum if the final image is formed at the near point of the eye

Magnification:

In the compound microscope magnification takes place in two steps; first by the objective and then by the eyepiece. If the magnification produced by the objective is mo and that produced by the eyepiece is me  then the magnification of the microscope

m = mo × m…………….. (1)

If the distance of the object PQ from the objective is u and the distance of the image Q2 formed by the objective is v, then

mo = \(=\frac{P_1 Q_1}{P Q}=\frac{v}{u}\) ……………(2)

As the eyepiece acts as a magnifying glass and the final image is formed at the near point,

me = \(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\) ……………(3)

[D = least distance of distinct vision and fe = focal length of the eyepiece]

From equations (1), (2) and (3) we have

m = \(\frac{v}{u}\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\) ……………(4)

Now, applying the general equation of lens for the objective we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f_o}\)

fo = (focal length of the objective)

Or, \(1+\frac{v}{u}=\frac{v}{f_o}\)

Or, \(\frac{v}{u}=\frac{v}{f_o}-1\)……………(5)

So magnification of the compound microscope

m = \(\left(\frac{v}{f_o}-1\right)\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\) ……………(6)

Since the image P1Q1 of the compound microscope is fanned at the end of the tube, i- = length of the tube =I (approx.)

m = \(\left(\frac{L}{f_o}-1\right)\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\) ……………(7)

Since \(f_o \ll L, f_e \ll D\)

So from equation (7) we have,

m = \(\frac{L}{f_o} \cdot \frac{D}{f_e}\)……………(8)

Dependence of magnification on various factors:

Equation (8) indicates that magnification produced by the compound microscope depends on the following factors:

1. Length of die tube (L )

2. Focal length of the objective (fo )

3. Focal length of the eyepiece (fe)

Optical Instruments Notes

However, the length of the tube cannot be increased indiscriminately as it will make handling the instrument difficult. For optimum use and advantage, the length of the rube is maintained within 20-25 cm.

Again, if the magnification of the image is very large, its brightness decreases considerably. So to obtain a sufficiently bright and magnified image the object is to be illuminated with a separate bright light.

To obtain the image free from defects like spherical aberration, chromatic aberration etc. more than one combination of lenses are used for objective and eyepiece.

Uses: In laboratories compound microscopes are widely used for different examinations; for example,  to examine blood cells in medical science, to study different cells for Botany and Zoology, etc

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Compound Microscope Numerical Examples

Example 1. The focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece of a compound microscope are 0.5cm and 1.5cm respectively. If the least distance of distinct vision is 25cm and magnification is 500 then what is the distance between the objective and the eyepiece?
Solution:

Here fo = 0.5cm, fe = 1.5cm, D =  25cm

Let L  = distance between eyepiece and objective.

We know that the magnification of the compound microscope

m = \(\frac{L D}{f_0 f_e}\)

Or, 500 = \(\frac{L \times 25}{0.5 \times 1.5}\)

Or, L = 15 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 2. The focal lengths of the two lenses of a compound microscope are 0.5 cm and 1 cm respectively. An object is placed at a distance of 1 cm from the objective. If the final image of the object is formed at a distance of 25 cm from the eye, what is the distance between the two lenses and the magnifying power of the microscope?
Solution:

In the compound microscope, the focal length of the eyepiece is greater than that of the objective. So for = 0.5 cm and fe = 1 cm. For the objective u = -1cm.

If  v is the image distance, then according to the equation of the lens

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{1}=\frac{1}{0.5}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{v}\)

Or, v = 1 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

So, the image is formed on the other side of the objective at a distance of 1 cm.

For the eyepiece, ve = -25 cm (the image is virtual and formed at the near point) and fe = 1 cm

We have from the equation of the lens

⇒ \(-\frac{1}{25}-\frac{1}{u_e}=\frac{1}{1}\)

or, \(\frac{1}{u_e}=\frac{1}{-25}-1\)

= \(-\frac{26}{25}\)

or, \(u_e=-\frac{25}{26}\)

= – 0. 96 cm

The distance between the two lenses

= |v| + |ue| =1 + 0.96 = 1.96 cm

The magnifying power of the microscope,

m = \(\frac{v}{u}\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\)

= \(\frac{1}{1}\left(1+\frac{25}{1}\right)\)

= 26

Example 3. The focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece are 1 cm and 4 cm respectively. The distance between them is 14.5 cm. If an object of height 1 mm is placed at a distance of 1.1 cm from the objective what will be the position and the size of the image seen through the microscope?
Solution:

Here, fo = 1 cm and fe = 4 cm.

For the objective, u = -1.1 cm. If the image of the object is formed at a distance v, we have, from the equation of the lens,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{1.1}=\frac{1}{1}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{10}{11}\) = 1

Or, v = 11cm

So, the image formed by the objective Is at a distance v on the other side of the objective and this image is real. This image acts as an object tor the eyepiece

∴  \(m_1=\frac{v}{u}=\frac{11}{1.1}\) = 10

Now, the object distance relative to the eyepiece

= -(14.5-11) = -3.5 cm

If the image is formed at a distance of V from the eyepiece we have from the equation of the lens

⇒ \(\frac{1}{V}+\frac{1}{3.5}=\frac{1}{4}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{V}=-\frac{2}{7}+\frac{1}{4}\)

Or, V = -28 cm

This image is virtual and will be formed at a distance of 28 cm in front of the eyepiece

m2 = \(\frac{28}{3.5}\)

= 8

∴ Magnification of the final image

m = m1× m2 × = 10 × 8 = 80

The size of the final image = 80 × 1 = 80 mm = 8 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 4. The focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece of the compound microscope are 1 cm and 5 cm respectively and the distance between the centres of the lenses is 15 cm. If the final image Is formed at the least distance of distinct vision, what la the magnifying power of the microscope?
Solution:

For the eyepiece, v = least distance of distinct vision =- 25 cm, fe = 5 cm, object distance = u.

According to the equation of the lens, we have,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-25}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{5}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{u}=-\left(\frac{1}{25}+\frac{1}{5}\right)\)

Or, \(-\frac{6}{25}\)

u = – \(\frac{25}{6}\)

So, the image formed by the objective is formed at a distance of \(-\frac{25}{6}\) cm in front of the eyepiece.

Therefore, this image is formed behind the objective at a distance (l5-\(-\frac{25}{6}\) ) or, \(\frac{65}{6}\)cm, The image distance of the object, v = \(-\frac{65}{6}\) cm

Therefore, the total magnification of the compound microscope

m = \(\left(\frac{v}{f_o}-1\right)\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\)

= \(\left(\frac{\frac{65}{6}}{1}-1\right)\left(1+\frac{25}{5}\right)\)

= \(\frac{59}{6} \times 6\)

= 59

Example 5. The focal lengths of the objective antiI the eyepiece of n compound microscope arc 1 cm and 2 cm respectively and the distance between them Is 12 cm. If the least distance of distinct vision of the observer Is 25 cm, where should a small object be placed to see it?
Solution:

For the eyepiece, fe = 2 cm, v = – 25 cm. So, from the equation of the lens, we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-25}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{2}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{u}=-\left(\frac{1}{25}+\frac{1}{2}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{27}{50}\)

or, u = – \(\frac{50}{27}\) cm

So, the image formed by the objective is formed in front of the eyepiece at a distance \(\frac{50}{27}\) cm Hence, the image is formed behind the objective at a distance (12- \(\frac{50}{27}\)) or, \(\frac{274}{27}\)cm i.e., the image distance of the object relative to tire objective v = \(\frac{274}{27}\)cm

The focal of the objective fo = 1 cm from the equation of the lens we have,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\frac{274}{27}}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{1}\)

Or, \(\frac{27}{274}-\frac{1}{u}\) = 1

Or, \(-\frac{1}{u}=1-\frac{27}{274}\)

= \(\frac{247}{274}\)

Or, u = – \(\frac{274}{247}\) = -1.11 cm

∴ The required object distance = 1.11 cm

Example 6. An object is placed at a distance of 5 cm from the objective of a compound microscope. The final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision and coincides with the object then calculates the focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece. Given that the least distance of distinct vision = 25 cm and the magnifying power of the instrument = 15
Solution:

For the objective,

Image distance = v, object distance = u

For the eyepiece, image distance = v1 , object distance = u1

∴ According to the problem,

u = 5 cm and v1 = 25 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

Since the object and the final image coincide, the distance between the objective and the eyepiece is 25-5 = 20 cm.

∴ v +u1 = 20…………………………………………………..(1)

Again, the total magnification of the Instrument magnification by the objective x magnification by the eyepiece.

15 = \(\frac{v}{u} \times \frac{v_1}{u_1}\)

Or, \(\frac{v}{5} \times \frac{25}{u_1}\)

Or, \(\frac{v}{u_1}\)

Solving equations (1) and (2) we have,

v = 15 cm and , = 5 cm

For the objective,

u = -5 cm and v = +15 cm [∴  image is real]

According to the equation of lens we have,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{15}-\frac{1}{-5}=\frac{1}{f_o}\) Or,

fo = 3.75 cm

For the eyepiece,

u1= -5 cm and v1 = -25 cm [as image is virtual]

According to the equation of lens we have,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-25}-\frac{1}{-5}=\frac{1}{f_e}\)

Or, fe = 6.25

So, the focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece are 3.75 cm and 6.25 cm respectively.

Optical Instruments Notes

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Telescope

Objects situated at large distances are not visible distinctly with the naked eye as these objects subtend very small visual angles at our eyes. The telescope makes it possible by forming an image that subtends a greater angle as compared to the original object. The image formed is a virtual image.

Telescopes are mainly of two types:

1. Asfronomicaltelescope:

It is used to see astronomical objects such as planets, stars, etc. Here the final image is virtual and inverted relative to the object. Sometimes the astro¬ nomical telescope is also called simply a telescope.

2. Torrosfrlal telescope: It is used to see distant objects situated on the surface or near the surface of the earth here the final image is virtual and erect relative to the object

From the constructional point of view, there Is not much difference between an astronomical telescope and a larger telescope pc. Terrestrial telescope has a provision of erecting the Until image, which astronomical telescope does not have

According to construction, astronomical telescopes are of two types:

  1. Refracting telescope: In this type of telescope, the object tive is made of a single lens or a combination of lenses.
  2. Reflecting telescope: In this type of telescope, a large concave or paraboloidal mirror is used as the objective. Nowadays many different types of telescopes are In use, such as radio telescopes, Infrared telescopes, X-ray telescopes, high energy particle telescopes, gravitational wave telescopes, etc

Refracting Astronomical Telescope:  In this instrument, two convex lenses are mounted ina tube so as to have a common axis. here objective O has an

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Refracting Astromical Telescope

Large focal length and a large aperture. Comparatively, eyepiece B has a very small focal length and a very small aperture. The aperture of the eyepiece is taken almost equal to that of the pupil of the eye so that all the refracted rays from the eyepiece enter the eye. The distance between the objective and the eyepiece in the tube can be adjusted by a screw.

Working principle:

Shows that the rays from a distant object are incident on the objective. As the object is situated at a large distance the rays from It may be taken as parallel. So a real, inverted, and very diminished image (BP) compared to the object is formed at the focal plane of the objective. This image acts as an object for the eyepiece which then forms the final image.

Rays from the Image BP diverge and fall on the eyepiece. The eyepiece is so placed that B becomes its first principal focus. Hence, the rays after refraction emerge as parallel rays. To adjust the eyepiece in the proper position is called focusing

After focusing one can easily observe a virtual and largely magnified image through the eyepiece. Since the first image is inverted the virtual image is also inverted with respect to the object. This type of focussing of the telescope is called focussing for infinity and this adjustment is called normal adjustment.

Again, the astronomical telescope may be used in such a way that the final virtual image is formed at the near point of the eye i.e., at the least distance of distinct vision. For this, the eyepiece moved a little distance towards the objective so that the image PQ1 formed by the is the objective comes within the focal length of the eyepiece. Then the eyepiece forms a magnified virtual image pq at the near point of the eye. This image pq is erect with respect to PQ1 but inverted with respect to the original object This type of focusing is called focussing for distinct vision.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Focusssing For Distinct Vision

Optical Instruments Notes

Magnification:

The magnitude of an astronomical or terrestrial telescope Is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended) by the final Image at the eye to the angle subtended by the object. As the object Is situated tit a large distance the angle subtended by the object to the naked eye Is taken to be equal to the angle subtended at the objective. As the eye Is placed very close to the eyepiece the angle subtended by the final image at the eye and the angle subtended at the eyepiece are virtually equal

In the case of focusing on Infinity According to the angular magnification

m = Angle subtended at the eye by the final image Angle subtended at the eye by the object

= \(\frac{\beta}{\alpha}=\frac{\angle F E P}{\angle F O P}=\frac{\tan \angle F E P}{\tan \angle F O P}\)

If is small then tan 0 = 0

m = \(\frac{\frac{F P}{E F}}{\frac{F P}{O F}}=\frac{O F}{E F}=\frac{f_o}{f_e}\)

(fo = focal length of the objective and f = focal length of the eyepiece]

So it is seen that for large magnification, the focal length of the. objective should be large and that of the eyepiece should be small

Again with the help of similar triangles, it can be proved

⇒ \(\frac{f_0}{f_0}=\frac{\text { diameter of the objective }}{\text { diameter of the eye-piece }}\)

m = \(\frac{\text { diameter of the objective }}{\text { diameter of the eye-piece }}\) ………………….(2)

In the case of focusing on distinct vision: According to the angular magnification,

m = \(\frac{\beta}{\alpha}=\frac{\tan \beta}{\tan \alpha}=\frac{\frac{P Q_1}{E Q_1}}{\frac{P Q_1}{O Q_1}}\)

= \(\frac{O Q_1}{E Q_1}=\frac{f_0}{E Q_1}\)………………….(3)

[OQ1 = fo as the objective forms the image PQ j of the distant object at its focal plane.]

Now, PQ1 is the object for refraction in the eyepiece and pq is its image.

Object distance, u = EQ1

As the image pq is formed at the least distance of distinct vision,

Image distance, v =  Eq = D

Therefore, according to the equation of lens

⇒ \(\frac{1}{E q}-\frac{1}{E Q_1}=-\frac{1}{f_e}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{E Q_1}=\frac{1}{E q}+\frac{1}{f_e}=\frac{1}{D}+\frac{1}{f_e}\)

We get from the equation (3),

m = \(f_o\left(\frac{1}{D}+\frac{1}{f_e}\right)=\frac{f_o}{f_e}\left(\frac{f_e}{D}+1\right)\)………………….(4)

In the case of focusing for infinity as the final image is formed at infinity, so Eq = D →∞

So, from equation (4) we get,

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_e}\) which supports equation (1)

Optical Instruments Notes

Hence, from equations (1) and (4) it can be observed that in case of focussing for distinct vision, magnification of the telescope increases in the ratio \(\left(\frac{f_c}{D}+1\right)\): 1 If the magnification is very large, the brightness of the image decreases. To increase the brightness of the image necessary arrangement has to be made for allowing light from the object to enter the instrument.

So, the aperture of the objective of this type of telescope is made as large as possible i.e.„ the objective is generally of a large diameter. Moreover, if the aperture of the objective is large, it is possible to examine die object minutely, fe the resolving power of the instrument increases. to remove or reduce the defects of all sorts of aberration, instead of a single lens for each of the objective and the eyepiece a combination of lenses should be used.

Length of the tube of the astronomic telescope:

By the term ‘length of the tube’ of an astronomical telescope, we mean the distance between the objective and the eyepiece. If the length of the tube is L , then

In case of focusing on infinity,

L = fo + fe …………………….. (5)

In case of focussing on a distinct vision

L = OQ1+ EQ1

⇒ \(f_o+\frac{1}{\frac{1}{D}+\frac{1}{f_e}}\)

⇒ \(f_o+\frac{D f_e}{D+f_e}\)…………………….. (5)

Limitations of refracting astronomical telescope: 

As the only lens is used in refracting astronomical telescopes, this instrument has defected to chromatic aberration. For this the final image became hazy. It is a disadvantage to scrutinize the object in views to be noted that, no lens can converge the rays of all in a single point.

For this reason, no image formed becomes distinct, i.e., during the formation of an image, there remains some error all the time. This error is called chromatic aberration.

OH’ To get bright images of distant objects like stars, planets, etc., the aperture of the objective lens is to be made large. However it is extremely difficult and expensive to make an objective lens of a very large aperture. Urns are transparent. That is why, fixing of such a large lens (as an objective) rigidly in the right place is very difficult

Reflecting Astronomical Telescope

In reflecting astronomical telescope (also called a reflector) concave mirror is used in place of the objective lens. It was discovered in the 17th century. It is free from chromatic aberration. Besides, it is easier to construct an objective of a larger aperture and its construction cost is also less.

Mirrors being not transparent, it Is possible to fix a large mirror, as an objective, rigidly in the right place. For this reason, In astronomical studies, most of the telescopes used are of reflecting type. In this regard it is to be noted that the reflecting astronomical telescope is one of the most important instruments used in scientific research

Reflecting astronomical telescopes are of different types, namely the

  1. Gregorian telescope,
  2. Newtonian telescope, and
  3. Cassegrain telescope.

The designs of modern-day telescopes are mainly based on these three types.

Optical Instruments Notes

1. Gregorian telescope: Scottish astrophysicist and mathematician James Gregory published the design of this telescope first in his book in 1663. Based on this, British physicist Robert Hook made the telescope in 1673.

Gregorian Telescope Construction:

The Gregorian telescope consists of two concave mirrors, out of which the primary mirror is parabolic and the secondary one is elliptical in nature. Parallel rays from very long distant objects fall on the primary mirror and getting reflected from it meet at its focusThe secondary mirror is placed beyond the focus of the primary mirror in such a manner that, rays after meeting at focus incident on the secondary mirror as divergent rays.

Then the rays get reflected from it (the secondary mirror) and finally emerge through a small hole made in the primary mirror Thus one can view a magnified erect image through the eyepiece placed at the back of the primary mirror.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Primary And Secondary Mirror

Gregorian telescope Advantages:

  1. At the focus of the primary mirror, a small but distinct real image of the object under observation is formed.
  2. As a result, the final virtual image becomes much brighter and more distinct

Optical Instruments Notes

2. Newton telescope:

Newton made this telescope in 1668. It was the first usable Gregorian reflector.

Newton Telescope Construction:

In this telescope, objective I is a concave mirror of large focal B length and big aperture. This mirror is placed at one end of a tube of large diameter and the other end of the tube is focused towards distant objects to watch. A plane mirror M2 is placed between the concave lens and its focus. It is inclined at an angle of 15° to the axis of mirror My. The eyepiece E con consists of a convex lens of small focal length and a small aperture is placed in an adjacent tube.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Newtonian Telescope

Optical Instruments Notes

Newton Telescope Formation of image:

The parallel rays coming from a distant object AB are incident on the mirror Mine. After reflection by’ M2, the reflected converging rays are reflected again by plane mirror M2, and a small real image A’B’ is formed between M2 and E. This image A’B’ acts as an object for eyepiece E. A magnified virtual image A”B” of A’B’ is formed at the least distance of distinct vision or at infinity. If A ‘B’ is on the focus plane of eyepiece E, the final image is formed at infinity

Newton Telescope Magnification: Magnification of telescope

m= \(\frac{\text { angle subtended in eye by the final image }}{\text { angle subtended in eye by the object }}\)

If the final image is formed at infinity, then it can be shown that

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_e}\)

Here, fo = focal length of concave mirror My which is used as an objective; fe = focal length of eyepiece

Now, fo = \(\frac{R}{2}\) -; R – radius of curvature of the objective. Therefore, the magnification of the reflecting telescope will be increased by increasing the radius of curvature of the concave mirror, used as an objective.

It is to be noted that, distorted images are formed due to rays emerging from the edge of the lens or reflected from the edge of the mirror Hence the images become erroneous. Such errors are called spherical aberration.

To avoid such spherical aberration, a paraboloid mirror is used in a modem reflecting telescope.

Newton Telescope Advantages:

  • The image formed by a reflecting telescope is brighter than the image formed by a refracting telescope.
  • This is because, in a reflecting telescope, no loss of light takes place by reflection and absorption at lens surfaces.
  •  In a reflecting telescope, the use of a parabolic mirror removes spherical aberration and chromatic aberration of the image.
  • The concave mirror used in a reflecting telescope is less expensive than the lens used in a refracting telescope.

Newton Telescope Disadvantages:

  • Alignment of different parts is required every time it is used.
  • There is a central obstruction due to the secondary mirror in the light path, causing the light to be scattered in all directions. Hence, the contrast of the image decreases.
  • At the time of observation of a star through a reflecting telescope, if the eye of the observer is positioned near the edge of the field of view, then stars look like comets. This type of defect Is known as a coma

3. Cassograln reflecting telescope:

Laurent Cassegrain had published the design of this telescope in 1672.

Cassograln telescope Construction: In, a Cassegrain reflecting telescope is

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Cassegrain Reflecting Telescope

In this telescope, the objective is a large parabolic mirror O with a hole in its centre. The aperture of this mirror is large. A small convex hyperbolic mirror M is placed in front of the objective. A convex lens E acts as an eyepiece is placed back of the objective.

In a small-sized telescope, the focal length of the eyepiece is large.

Cassograln telescope Formation of image:

The parallel rays coming from a distant object are incident on the objective O and after reflection from the objective, the rays are incident on the convex mirror M. In the absence of convex mirror M, the reflected rays from the objective would meet at its principal focus.

Hence, in the presence of convex mirror M, the rays coming from the objective are reflected again and a real and inverted image is formed at the point F. This inverted image is seen through the eyepiece E.

In the world, presently many observatories are in function, among which a very notable one is—the Roque de los Muchachos observatory of La Palma, Spain. Its ‘Gran Telescopio Canarias’ is one of the most developed telescopes in the world. Presently it is the largest reflecting telescope with unit aperture in the world. Us effective aperture is 10.4 m and the focal length is 16.5 m. It is situated at the top of a volcano at a height of 2267m from sea level. ”

India can boast of having an observatory at the highest altitude. It is located at a height of 4572 m from sea level at Hanle, Ladakh. Only in this. of the world, the sky remains clear almost 250 days at night

Optical Instruments Notes

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Numerical Examples

Example 1. The focal lengths of the eyepiece and the objective are 10cm and 200cm respectively. If someone wants to observe the moon with the naked eye through this telescope then what should be the distance between the objective and the eyepiece?
Solution:

If someone wants to observe the moon with the naked eye then the telescope should be focused at the infinity

For focussing at infinity, the length of the tube is

L = fo +fe = 200 + 10 = 210cm

Hence, the distance between the two lenses is 210cm.

Example 2. The length of the tube of an astronomical telescope is 44 cm and its angular magnification is 10. What is the focal length of its objective?

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_e}\)

Or, fe =  \(\frac{f_o}{m}\)

Length of the tube

L = \(\frac{f_o}{m}=f_o\left(1+\frac{1}{m}\right)\)

L =  \(f_o\left(\frac{m+1}{m}\right)\)

Or, \(f_o=L \frac{m}{m+1}\)

⇒ \(44 \times \frac{10}{10+1}\)

= 40 cm

Example 3. A small astronomical telescope has an objective focal length of 50 cm and an eyepiece of focal length of 5 cm. It is focused on the sun and the final image is formed at a distance of 25 cm from the eyepiece. The diameter of the sun subtends an angle of 32′ at the center of the objective to calculate the angular magnification of the instrument and the actual size of the image.
Solution:

Here, f = 50 cm , f= 5 cm and D = 25 cm .

Angular magnification of the instrument,

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_e}\left(1+\frac{f_e}{D}\right)\)

= \(\frac{50}{5}\left(1+\frac{5}{25}\right)\)

= \(10 \times \frac{6}{5}\)

= 12

Optical Instruments Notes

If the angle subtended at the eyepiece by the final image is and the angle subtended at the center of the objective by the sun is a, then

m = \(\frac{\beta}{\alpha}\)

Or β = ma = \(\left(12 \times \frac{32}{60}\right)^{\circ}\)

= \(\frac{32}{5} \times \frac{\pi}{180}\) rad

If the actual size of the image is I, then

Or, β = \(\frac{l}{D}\)

I = βD = \(\frac{32}{5} \times \frac{\pi}{180} \times 25\)

= 2.793

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 4. If the focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece of an astronomical telescope are 100 cm and 20 cm respectively, calculate the angular magnification of the instrument. If a house of height 60 m situated at a distance of 1 km is observed by the instrument determine the height of the image formed by the objective

Angular magnification of the telescope,

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_e}=\frac{100}{20}\)

= 5

For the objective

fo = 100 cm , u = -1 km = -105 cm

According to the equation of lens, we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}=-\frac{1}{10^5}+\frac{1}{100}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{v}=-\frac{1}{10^5}+\frac{1}{100}\)

or, v = 100.1 cm

Magnification \(\frac{v}{u}=\frac{100.1}{10^5}\)

= \(\frac{1}{10^3}\)

= \(=\frac{\text { size of the image }}{\text { size of the object }}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{10^3}=\frac{\text { size of the image }}{60 \times 100}\)

Size of the image \(\frac{6000}{1000}\)

= 6 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 5. The distance between the Earth and the moon is 386242.56 km and the diameter of the moon is 3218.69km. If the focal length of . the objective of a telescope is 0.018288km then what is the diameter of a real image of the moon formed by the objective?
Solution:

Moon is at a large distance from Earth so the image will be formed at the focal plane of the objective.

Now, \(\frac{\text { distance of the image }}{\text { diameter of the image }}=\frac{\text { distance of the moon }}{\text { diameter of the moon }}\)

Or, \(\frac{0.018288}{\text { diameter of the image }}=\frac{386242.56}{3218.69}\)

∴ Diameter of the image = \(\frac{0.018288}{\text { diameter of the image }}=\frac{386242.56}{3218.69}\)

= 1.52  × 10-4  km

Hence, the diameter of the real image of the moon is 1.52 × 10-4 4km.

Optical Instruments Notes

Example 6. The focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece of a compound microscope are 2m and 5cm respectively. The distance between the two lenses is 20cm. The final image is formed at a 25cm distance from the objective calculate the distance between the eyepiece and the final image

Here fo = 2m , fe = 5cm

Distance between two lenses (L) = 20cm

Distance between final image and objective (u) = 25cm

The distance between the final image and the eyepiece is

D = l + L = 25 + 20 = 45cm

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Long Question Answers

Question 1. What will happen to the image if one-half of the objective lens is covered with black paper?
Answer:

The size of the image will remain unchanged if one-half of the objective lens is covered with black paper, Only the brightness of the image will decrease to some extent. Here half of the objective lens takes part in the formation of the image. So the complete image is formed. The brightness of the image will be reduced to half as the amount of refracted light is reduced to half

Question 2. The radius of the sun is about 106 km it looks like a disc why?
Answer:

The distance of the Sun from the Earth is about 108 km. So the visual angle subtended at the eyes of a man on the earth is = \(\frac{10^6}{10^8}\). Since this value of the visual angle is very small, the sun looks like a disc

Question 3. Explain how you can identify a telescope and a micro¬ scope from their appearance.
Answer:

The aperture of the objective of the telescope is made large in comparison to its eyepiece to get sufficient light from distant objects. On the other hand, the aperture of the objective of a microscope is small in comparison to its eyepiece. So, by observing the size of the objectives and the eyepieces of the two instruments we can identify them. Moreover, for large magnification, the length of the tube of a telescope is larger than that of the microscope.

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 4. Why is the diameter of the objective of an astronomical telescope made large?
Answer:

As the object is situated at a large distance, it subtends a small visual angle at the objective. So, the image is made large by the astronomical telescope. But in that case, the brightness of the image decreases. If the diameter of the objective is large, a large amount of light from the object enters the telescope and increases the brightness. So, the diameter of the objective of an astronomical telescope is made large

Question 5. Though the lamp posts on a road are of the same height, the distant posts appear shorter—explain the reason.
Answer:

The angle subtended at the eye by the object is called the visual angle. If the visual angle increases, the size of the image formed on the retina also increases. i.e., the object appears to be of large size. The lamp posts situated at large distances from a viewer subtend small angles at the eyes. Hence the lamp posts Seen from large distances appear to be relatively short

Question 6. For making a telescope two lenses of foeat lengths 5 cm and 50 cm are to be used. Which lens will you use for objective
Answer:

Focussing on infinity the magnifying power of a telescope is given by,

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_c}\)

where fo = focal length of the objective and

fe  = focal length of the eyepiece

So for higher magnifying power should be greater than fe.

Hence the lens of larger focal length i.e., 50 cm is to be used as an objective

Question 7. Which of the following lenses L1, L2, and L3 will you select to construct a best possible 

  1. Telescope,
  2. Microscope

 Which of the selected lenses Is to be used as objective and eyepiece In each case?

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Lens

Optical Instruments Notes

Answer:

A telescope should have an objective of a larger focal length and of larger aperture and an eyepiece of a much smaller focal length and aperture. The power of a lens is less means that the focal length of this lens is large because power is the reciprocal of focal length. So lens Lis to be used as objective (focal length and aperture largest) and L1 as eyepiece (focal length and aperture smallest).

A microscope should have an objective of very small focal length and small aperture and an eyepiece of comparatively larger focal length and larger aperture. So lens L3 is to be used as the objective and  L1 as the eyepiece.

Question 8. What do you mean by resolving power of an optical Instrument? How does the resolving power ora the telescope depend on the wavelength of light and the diameter of the objective lens?
Answer:

The ability of an optical instrument to separate or distinguish close adjacent images is called the resolving power of that optical Instrument.

Resolving power and resolving limit are reciprocal. If the wavelength of light Is λ and the diameter of the objective is d, then the resolving limit of a telescope,

⇒ \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{d}\)

Resolving power = \(\frac{1}{\theta}=\frac{d}{1.22 \lambda}\)

Hence, if the wavelength of light decreases then resolving power of telescope Increases and if diameter of objective lens is increased then the resolving power of telescope will also increase

Question 9. The focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece of n compound microscope are It mm and 2.5 cm respectively. A man with a normal near point (25 cm ) can focus distinctly on an object placed at a distance of 9 mm from the objective of the microscope. What Is the separation between the lenses and magnification power of the Instrument?
Answer:

For the objective, fo – 0.11 cm and uo = -0.9 cm

From \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we get,

⇒ \(\frac{0.8 \times(-0.9)}{-0.9+0.8}\) = 7.2 cm

For the eyepiece, fe = 2.5 cm and ve = -25 cm

= \(\frac{v_e f_c}{f_e-v_e}=\frac{-25 \times 2.5}{2.5+25}\)

= \(-\frac{25}{11}\)

= -2.27 cm

Optical Instruments Notes

The distance between the two lenses

vo + ue = 7.2 + 2.27 = 9.47 cm

Magnification power,

m = \(\frac{v_o}{u_o} \times \frac{v_c}{u_e}=\frac{7.2}{0.9} \times \frac{25}{\frac{25}{11}}\)

= 88

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 10.

1. A giant refracting telescope at an observatory has an objective lens of focal length 15 m. If an eyepiece of focal length 1.0 cm is used, find the angular magnification of the telescope.
Answer: 

2. If this telescope is used to view the moon, what is the diameter of the image of the moon formed by the objective lens? The diameter of the moon is 3.48 x 106 m and the radius of the lunar orbit is 3.8 × 108 m
Answer:

Angular magnification \(=\frac{f_o}{f_e}=\frac{15}{0.01}\) = 1500

Since the rays are incident from infinity, the image will be formed at focus.

Diameter of the image

= \(\frac{\text { diameter of moon } \times \text { image distance }}{\text { distance of moon }}\)

= \(\frac{3.48 \times 10^6 \times 15}{3.8 \times 10^8}\)m

= 1.37 cm

Question 11. For a normal eye, the far point is at infinity and the point of vision is about 25 cm. The cornea of the eye provides a converging power of about,40 D and the least converging power of the eye lens behind the cornea is about 20 D. From this rough data estimate the range of accommodation (i.e., the range of converging power of the eye lens) of the normal eye.
Answer:

The eye uses its least converging power for an object placed at infinity- Therefore, total converging power of the = 40- 20 = 60 D. Now, for an object at infinity i.e., at u = ∞

Now, for an object at infinity i.e., at u = ∞,

v = f \(\frac{1}{P}=\frac{1}{60} m\)

= \(\frac{5}{3}\) cm

For the image of an object placed at the near point, the focal length is

f = \(\left(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\right)^{-1}=\frac{u v}{u-v}\)

= \(\frac{(-25) \times \frac{5}{3}}{(-25)-\frac{5}{3}}=\frac{25}{16} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Converging power of the lens \(\) = 64 D

Converging power of the eye lens =(64-40) =24D

Thus the range of accommodation of the eye lens is 20 D to 24 D.

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 12. A man with a normal near point (25 cm ) reads a book with a small print using a magnifying glass of focal length 5 cm.

1. What is the closest and farthest distance at which he can read the book when viewing it through the magnifying glass?

2. What is the  maximum and minimum angular magnification  {magnify power) possible using the above simple microscope?
Answer:

Minimum distance of the book from the lens

⇒ \(\frac{f v}{f-v}=-\frac{5 \times 25}{5+25}\)

= -4.2 cm

The maximum distance of the book from the lens is -5 cm because in that case, the image is at ∞

Maximum angular magnification (magnifying power)

⇒ \(\frac{25}{\frac{25}{6}}\) = 6

Minimum angular magnification (magnifying power

⇒  \(\frac{25}{5}\) = 5

Question 13. The magnifying power of a telescope In normal adjustment Is 20, and the focal length of the eyepiece Is 5 × 102 m. What is the magnifying power obtained when (the system Is adjusted so that the final Imago of a distant object Is formed 25 × 102m away from the eyepiece?
Answer:

m = \(\frac{f_0}{f_e}\)

Or, 20 = \(=\frac{f_0}{5 \times 10^{-2}}\)

Or, f = \(f_0=20 \times 5 \times 10^{-2}\)

Now, the magnifying power of the telescope

m = \(f_0\left(\frac{1}{D}+\frac{1}{f_e}\right)=1 \times\left(\frac{1}{25 \times 10^{-2}}+\frac{1}{5 \times 10^{-2}}\right)\)

= 24

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 14. A person who can see objects clearly at n distance of 10cm, requires spectacles to be able to see clearly objects at a distance of 30 cm. What type of spectacle should be used? Find the focal length of the lens

The image of an object at a distance of 50cm has to be formed at a distance of 10cm. In this case, u = -30 cm, v = -10 cm. If the focal length of the lens used Isf then

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{-10}-\frac{1}{-30}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{30}-\frac{1}{10}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1-3}{30}=-\frac{1}{15}\)

or,  f = -15 cm

Since f Is negative, the person should use n spectacle with a concave lens

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 15. Define the magnifying power of a compound microscope when the final image is formed at Infinity. Why must both the objective and the eyepiece of a compound microscope hit short focal lengths? Explain.
Answer:

The magnification of compound microscope when the final image is formed at Infinity, m = \(\frac{L}{f_o}\left(\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\) ‘ For producing large magnifying power, both the objective and the eyepiece of a compound microscope should possess short focal length.

When m = \(\frac{L}{f_o}\left(\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\)

f<<L, f<<D,

m = \(\left(\frac{L}{f_o}-1\right)\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\)

= \(\approx\left(\frac{L}{f_o} \cdot \frac{D}{f_e}\right)\)

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Short Question And Answers

Question 1. Can we consider spectacles as a visual instrument
Answer:

The instrument which helps us to visualize an object is called a visual instrument. In that sense spectacles; can be called visual instruments. If we have some error in our eyes, we use spectacles to rectify that error and make our vision clearer.  Hence, spectacles can be considered a visual instrument

Question 2. In which telescope the final image Image is erect?
Answer: In terrestrial telescope and (Gallean telescope the final image is erect.

Question 3. What do you moan by binocular vision?
Answer:

Observing a 3-dimensional Image of an object with the help of two eyes Is called binocular vision. So with binocular vision, we can predict not only the length and breadth Inn also the height of an object.

Question 4. What is the main difference between a Galilean telescope and a simple terrestrial telescope?
Answer: 

lf make the final Image erect with respect to the object, the Galilean telescope only has two lenses one Is convex and another one Is concave. For the same reason, a simple terrestrial telescope has three convex lenses

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 5. When viewing through a compound microscope, our eyes should be positioned not on the eyepiece but a short distance away from it for best viewing. Why? How much should be the short distance between the eye and the eyepiece?
Answer: 

The light rays coming from an object, after refraction through the eyepiece of the compound microscope pass through a small circular region. If we place our eyes on this region, the image is viewed distinctly. This region is the eye ring or exit ring. If we place our eyes very near to the eyepiece, some of the refracted rays would not reach the eye, and the field of view would decrease. Obviously, the right position of the eye ring depends on the distance between the objective and the eyepiece of the microscope

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 6. In viewing through a magnifying glass, one usually positions one’s eyes very close to the lens. Does angular magnification change if the eye is moved back?
Answer: 

Yes, there is a very small decrease in the angular magnification. Because the angle subtended by the object at the eye becomes somewhat less than the angle subtended at the lens. However, if the object is at a large distance, then the decrease is negligible.

Question 7. Why should the objective of n telescope have a large focal length and large aperture? Justify your answer.
Answer:

The objective of the telescope is a convex lens of large focal length because it faces distant objects and forms bright Images of distant objects. The aperture of the objective is taken large so that it can gather a sufficient amount of light from distant objects.

 

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Synopsis

If an object is placed in front of the eye then an image of the object is formed on the retina of the eye.

1. Eye lens:

It is a bi-convex lens of variable focal length made of a transparent and flexible substance. The average refractive index for different parts of the lens is approximately 1.45.

2. Accommodation of the eye:

The ability of the eye to alter its focal length and hence to focus the images of objects at various distances on the retina is called accommodation of the eye.

3. The minimum distance from the eye up to which objects can be seen clearly and easily is known as the least distance of distinct vision.

4. The distance between the near and far points of the eye is called the range of vision. Within this range, wherever the object is situated, our eyes can see it by accommodation.

The pupil of our eyes automatically contracts in light of high intensity and expands in light of low intensity. This ability of our eyes is called an adaptation of the eye.

5. When an object produces its image on the retina of the eye, the impression thus produced does not disappear immediately after the object is removed. The impression persists for a second in our brain and it is known as the persistence of vision.

6. When we see an object, each eye forms an image of the object, so that two sets of impressions reach the brain simultaneously and the brain correlates these to get a single impression of the object.

7. As a result, a three-dimensional view of the object can be seen. This kind of vision of a three-dimensional impression of an object by two eyes Is known as binocular vision

8. Different kinds of defects of vision:

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Different Kinds Of Defects Of Vision

9. The Instrument by which we can see a magnified image of very small objects is called a microscope.

Optical Instruments Notes

There are two types of microscopes:

  1. Simple microscope or magnifying glass and
  2. Compound microscope.

10. The point at the minimum distance at which an object can be seen easily and clearly by the eye is called the near point of the eye in the case of a normal eye it is about 28 cm from the eye

11. The power lor separating the Images of two objects lying close it, to each other Is called the resolving power of an optical Instrument

12. Angular magnification

= \(\frac{\text { angle subtended by the image at the eve }}{\text { angle subtended by the object at the eye }}\)

Angular magnification in case compound microscope

(where L = length ofthe tube = v +fe.

D = the least distance of distinct vision.

fo = focal length of the objective lens,

fe = focal length of the eyepiece lens]

13. In case of focusing at infinity, the angular magnification of a telescope

m = \(\frac{f_o}{f_e}=\frac{\text { diameter of the objective }}{\text { diameter of the eye-piece }}\)

And the length of the telescope tube. L = fo +fe

In case of focussing for clear vision, angular magnification

m = \(\frac{f_e}{f_e}\left(\frac{f_c}{D}+1\right)\) and length of the telescope tube, L = \(f_o+\frac{D f_e}{D+f_e}\)

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Very Short Question And Answers

Question 1. Give a practical application of the persistence of vision
Answer: Cinema

Question 2. How can the defect of astigmatism be corrected?
Answer: By using spectacles with cylindrical or sphere cylindrical sense

Question 3. The minimum distance of distinct vision for a person is 1 m. What eye defect does he suffer from?
Answer: Long-sightedness

Question 4. If the least distance of distinct vision is D and the focal length of the lens is/ then what is the equation for magnification in a simple microscope?
Answer: \(\left[1+\frac{D}{f}\right]\)

Question 5. If the length of the tube of a compound microscope is increased, the magnification increases—Is this statement true or false?
Answer: True

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 6. In what type of telescope is the final image erect?
Answer: In terrestrial telescope and Galilean telescope

Question 7. What is used for the objective of a reflecting telescope?
Answer: A concave mirror

Question 8. Write the names of two ordinary types of the telescope.
Answer: Astronomical telescope and terrestrial telescope

Question 9. Is the length of the instrument to be changed if the focal length of the objective of an astronomical telescope is increased
Answer: Yes, the length will increase

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The impression of a three-dimensional image created by our two eyes is called___________________
Answer: Binocular vision

Question 2. For a normal eye the least distance of distinct vision is______________
Answer: 25 cm

Question 3. Vision of normal eye range from ____________ to______________________
Answer: 25cm, Infinity

Question 4. ______________ is the eye defect which old people usuallly suffer from ____________________
Answer: Presbyopia

Question 5. Cylindrical lenses are used as a remedy for ________________
Answer: Astigmatism

Question 6. For long – sightedness___________ lens should be used
Answer: Convex

Question 7. For short – sightedness___________ lens should be used
Answer: Concave

Question 8. If the focal length of the microscope is small, magnification is ________________
Answer: Large

Question 9. To increase the magnification of a compound microscope, the objective and the eyepiece of ______________ focal lengths and the microscope tube of ________ length are to be taken
Answer: Small, Large

Question 10. In an astronomical telescope, the focal length and the aperture of the objective are ____________ and the aperture of the eyepiece are taken ____________ compared to those of the objective
Answer: Lrge, Small

Question 11. The final image is an astronomical telescope is_____________ and _____________ with respect to the object
Answer: Virtual, Inverted

Question 12. The final image in a terrestrial telescope is__________ and ________ with respect to the object
Answer: Virtual, erect

Question 13. In Galileo’s telescope, the objective is ______________ lens but the eyepiece is ________________ lens.
Answer: Convex, Concave

Optical Instruments Notes

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Assertion-Reason

Direction:  These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is a correct explanation for statement 1
  2. Statement 1 is true, statement It Is true; statement 2 Is not a correct explanation for statement I.
  3. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 Is false, statement 2 Is true

Question 1.

Statement 1: An observer looks at a tree of height 15 cm with a telescope of magnifying power 10. To him, the tree appears to be of height 150 m

Statement 2: The magnifying power of a telescope is the ratio of the angle subtended by the image to that subtended by the object.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 Is false, statement 2 Is true

Question 2.

Statement 1: The resolving power of a telescope is greater if the diameter of the objective

Statement 2: An objective lens of large diameter collects more light.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is a correct explanation for statement 1

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Optical Instruments Match The Column

Question 1. Match the dependence of column 1 with column 2

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Angular Magnification

Answer: 1-B, 2-A,D, 3-C, 4 – B

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 2. Match the defects of the eye in column 1 with their remedies in column 2

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5 Defects Of The Eye And Remedies

Answer: 1-C, 2-D, 3-A, 4-B

Optical Instruments Notes

Question 3. Match the magnification of instruments in column 1 with the corresponding mathematical expressions in column 2

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 5

Answer: 1-C, 2-B, 3-A, 4-D

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Model Paper Solutions

Model Paper Question And Answers

Physics Model Paper  Question 1.

  1. A carbon resistor is Coloured with four different bands red, green, orange and silver respectively. Find the range of its probable resistance.
  2. The EMF of an electrical cell is 2 volts. A 10Ω resistance is joined at its two ends the potential difference is measured at 1.6 volts. Find out the internal resistance and lost volt,

Answer:

1. Red: 2, Green: 5, Orange: 3, zeroes, Silver: 10% error

∴  Resistance = 25000 ±10% Ω

10% of 25000 Ω = 250011Ω

∴ Range ofthe resistance

= (25000-2500) to (25000 + 2500)

= 22500 Ω to 27500 Ω

2. Lost volt = 2-1.6 = 0.4 V

Current through this circuit I = \(\frac{1.6 \mathrm{~V}}{10 \Omega}\)

= 0.16 A

Physics Model Paper

Model Paper Solutions

Internal resistance, r = \(\frac{I r}{I}=\frac{\text { lost volt }}{I}\)

= \(\frac{0.4 \mathrm{~V}}{0.16 \mathrm{~A}}\)

= 2.5 Ω

Question 2. A copper wire of length l metre is bent to form a circular loop. If I amp current flows through the loop, find out the magnitude of the magnetic moment ofthe loop.
Answer:

Circumference = 2πr = l

Or , r= \(\frac{l}{2 \pi} \mathrm{m}\)

So, the area of the loop, A = πr²

= \(\pi\left(\frac{l}{2 \pi}\right)^2=\frac{l^2}{4 \pi} \mathrm{m}^2\)

Magnitude of magnetic moment pm = \(i A=\frac{i l^2}{4 \pi} A\)

Question 3. How many α and β -particles are emitted when U238 changes to Pb206 due to radioactivity? Atomic numbers of U238 and Pb206 are 92 and 82 respectively.
Answer:

Let, x = number of α -particles emitted

y = number of β -particles emitted

Decrease in mass number = 4x

Decrease in atomic number = (2x-y)

Here, 4x = 238- 206 = 32 or, x = 8

And, 2x-y = 92-82 = 10

y = 2x- 10 = 2 × 8- 10

= 6

Model Paper Solutions

Question 4. A TV tower is 120 m high. How much more height is to be added to it if its coverage range is to double?
Answer:

Coverage range, d = \(\sqrt{2 h R}\)  where h = height of the TV tower

As R = radius ofthe earth = constant,d ∝ √h, So d becomes double when h becomes 4 times.

New height ofthe tower =4 × 120 = 480m

Increase in height = (480-120) = 360m

Question 5. Define electrical dipole moment. An electrical dipole is placed within a uniform electric field (E) and is rotated to an angle ∠θ = 180°. Find out the work done
Answer:

Two equal and opposite charges ±q, separated by a distance vector l directed from -q to +q, form an electric dipole. Its dipole moment is \(\vec{p}=q \vec{l}\)

Torque on an electric dipole in an electric field \(\vec{E}\) is, \(\vec{\tau}=\vec{p} \times \vec{E}\)

Its magnitude is, r = pEsind , where 6 = angle between p and \(\)

Work done to rotate the dipole from 0° to 180° is

W = \(\int d W=\int_0^{180} \tau d \theta\)

= \(=p E \int_0^{180} \sin \theta d \theta=p E[-\cos \theta]_0^{180}\)

= 2pE

Physics Model Paper

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Model Paper Solutions

Model Paper Solutions

Question 6.

  1. On what factors does the capacitance of a capacitor depend
  2. Two capacitors of capacitances 20μF and 60μF are connected in series. If the potential difference between the two ends of the combination is 40 volts, calculate the terminal potential difference of each capacitor.

Answer:

1. The area of each plate, and the distance between the capacitor plates and the intermediate medium are the factors on which the capacitance depends

2. In series combination, the charge q on both the capacitors is the same. As V = q/c we have V ∝ 1/C. Here, the ratio between the capacitances = \(\frac{20}{60}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\), so the  ratio between the terminal potential differences \(\frac{3}{I}\)

So, the total voltage of 40V will be distributed as 30V and 10V

Question 7. What do you mean by the angle of dip at a place? At what place on the earth’s surface will the horizontal and vertical components of the earth’s magnetic field be equal?
Answer:

At a place where the angle ofdip is 45° , horizontal and vertical components are H = I cos45° = \(\frac{I}{\sqrt{2}}\)and V = I sin45° = \(\frac{I}{\sqrt{2}}\) . So , V = H

Question 8. In Young’s double-slit experiment, what is the effect on the interference pattern if

  1. The distance between the two slits is halved.
  2. The distance between the screen and the plane of limits is doubled.
  3. One ofthe slits is covered with translucent paper

Answer:

Fringe width, y = \(\frac{D \lambda}{2 d}\)

1. Distance 2d between the slits is halved, then y is doubled.

2. Distance D between the screen and the plane of the slits is doubled, and then again y is doubled.

3. Due to an increase in the optical path for rays passing through the covered slit, the fringe pattern will be displaced sideways.

Model Paper Solutions

Question 9.

  1. An object of height 2.5 cm is placed perpendicularly on the principal axis of a concave mirror of focal length f at a distance of ¾ f What will be the nature of the image of the object and its height?
    Or,
  2.  A person uses spectacles of power +2D

Answer:

1. For concave mirrors, the focal length f is -f, using the proper sign

Also u =  – ¾

So the relation \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Gives, \(\frac{1}{v}+\left(-\frac{4}{3 f}\right)=\frac{1}{-f}\)

2.  \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{4}{3 f}-\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{3 f}\)

Or, v = 3f

The positive sign of v means that the image is formed on the opposite side, so it is a virtual image.

Magnification = \(-\frac{v}{u}=-\frac{3 f}{-(3 f / 4)}\)

Image height =4 × 2.5 = 10cm

The lens is convex. So the defect is long sight or hypermetropia

Model Paper Solutions

Question 10.

  1. Under what potential difference should an electron be accelerated to obtain a de Broglie wavelength of 0.6 Å (h = . 6.62 ×  10-34 J . s, me = 9.1 × 1-31 kg)
  2. Give an example of the production of electrons by photons.
  3. Light rays of wavelength λ and  λ/2 are incident photosensitive metal surfaces.’ If the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons from the metal surface in 2nd -case is 3 times the maximum kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons in the 1st case, then determine the work function of the metal.

Answer:

1. de Broglie wavelength \(\lambda=\frac{h}{p}\)

⇒ \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m e V}}\)

2 meV = \(\frac{h^2}{\lambda^2}\)

Or, = \(=\frac{h^2}{2 m e \lambda^2}\)

= \(\frac{\left(6.62 \times 10^{-34}\right)^2}{2 \times\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)}\times\left(0.6 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2\)

= 418 V

2. Example: Photoelectric Effect

3. Emax = \(h f-W_0=\frac{h c}{\lambda}-W_0\)

1st case,\(E_{\max }=\frac{h c}{\lambda}-W_0\)

2nd case, \(3 E_{\max }=\frac{h c}{\lambda / 2}-W_0=\frac{2 h c}{\lambda}-W_0\)

Or, \(E_{\max }=\frac{2}{3} \frac{h c}{\lambda}-\frac{1}{3} W_0\)

⇒ \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}-W_0=\frac{2}{3} \frac{h c}{\lambda}-\frac{1}{3} W_0\)

\(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\left(1-\frac{2}{3}\right)=W_0\left(1-\frac{1}{3}\right)\)

Or, \(W_0=\frac{\frac{1}{3} \frac{h c}{\lambda}}{2 / 3}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

Model Paper Solutions

Question 11. How is the characteristic X-ray spectrum formed?
Answer:

When high-energy cathode rays fall on the target of an X-ray tube, deep-rooted electrons of the target atoms may come out. If, say, a K-shell electron comes out of an atom, the vacancy is filled up by an electron of the immediately outer shells (L, M, …………). This electron transition produces an X-ray photon, whose frequency characterises the target atom. This is a characteristic X-ray.

Question 12. What are the majority and minority carriers in a p-type semiconductor?
Answer:

p -type semiconductor: majority carriers are holes and minority carriers are electrons.

Question 13. Convert the binary number 10011 into decimal equivalent
Answer:

(10011)2 =(1 × 24) + (0 × 23) + (0 × 22) + (1 × 21)+ (1 × 20)

= (16 + 0 + 0 + 2 + 1)

= (19)10

Model Paper Solutions

Question 14.

  1. In a potentiometer experiment, why is it necessary to use a long wire? The length and resistance of a potentiometer wire are 4 m and 10Ω respectively. It is connected to a cell of emf 2 volt. Another cell when joined to this potentiometer and null point is measured at 250 cm. Find out the emf ofthe second cell.
  2.  In a metre bridge when the resistance in the left gap is 2Ω and an unknown resistance in the right gap, the balance point is obtained at 40 cm from zero end. On shunting the unknown resistance with 2Ω, find the shift of the balance point on the bridge.
  3. 36 cells each of internal resistance 0.5fl and emf 1.5 V each are used to send current through an external circuit of 2fl resistance. Find the best mode of grouping them for maximum current and the current through the external circuit,

Answer:

1.  In different measurements using a potentiometer, the ratio 1/L often comes in the working formula. Here, L = length of the potentiometer wire, and l = length at which the null point is obtained.

Physics Model Paper

This ratio of 1/L is naturally accurate if both l and L are sufficiently large. So, a long wire is used in a potentiometer experiment. l = 250cm = 2.5m ; L = 4m ; emf ofthe potentiome¬ter cell, EQ = 2 V

So, the emf of the second cell = 1/L E0 = \(\frac{2.5}{4} \times 2\)

= 1.25 V

2. The unknown resistance (S) is on the right gap. So at the null point,

S = \(R \frac{100-l}{l}=2 \times \frac{100-40}{40}\)

= 3

Model Paper Solutions

If the balance is obtained at a distance l’ , then

⇒ \(S^{\prime}=R \frac{100-l^{\prime}}{l^{\prime}}=R\left(\frac{100}{l^{\prime}}-1\right)\)

⇒  \(\frac{100}{l^{\prime}}=1+\frac{S^{\prime}}{R}=\frac{R+S^{\prime}}{R}\)

= \(\frac{100 R}{R+S^{\prime}}=\frac{100 \times 2}{2+1.2}\)

= 62. 5 cm

Shift in balance point = 62.5 – 40 = 22.5cm

3.

Let, 36 cells are grouped in m rows, each row containing n cells. Then, mn = 36

Internal resistance in each row = nr; here, r = 0.5 × 1

Internal resistance for m rows = nr/m

Total resistance in the circuit = \(\left(R+\frac{n r}{m}\right)\): here

R = 2

Model Paper Solutions

The emf of each row = nE = effective emf of m rows;

here, E = 1.5 V

Current in an external circuit

I = \(\frac{n E}{R+\frac{n r}{m}}=\frac{m n E}{m R+n r}\)

⇒ \(\frac{m n E}{(\sqrt{m R}-\sqrt{n r})^2+2 \sqrt{m n R r}}\)

As mnR constant I is maximum \((\sqrt{m R}-\sqrt{n r})^2\) = 0

mR = nr

Or, \(\frac{36}{n} \times 2=n \times 0.5\)

= n x 0.5

Or, \(n^2=\frac{36 \times 2}{0.5}\) = 44

Then , n= 12 and m = \(\frac{36}{12}\)

= 3

So, the best mode of grouping is in 3 rows, each row having 12 cells

Question 15. Determine the resonance frequency ωr of a series LCR circuit with L = 2.0H, C = 32μF and R = 10 Ω. What is the Q -value of this circuit?
Answer:

L = 2.0 H, C = 32 μ F = 32 × 106  F , R = 10 × 1 Resonance frequency,

⇒ \(\omega_r=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2 \times 32 \times 10^{-6}}}\)

= \(\frac{1000}{8}\)

= 125 Hz

Q = \(=\frac{1}{R} \sqrt{\frac{L}{C}}=\frac{1}{10} \sqrt{\frac{2}{32 \times 10^{-6}}}\)

= \(\frac{1}{10} \times \frac{1000}{4}\)

= 25

Model Paper Solutions

Question 16.

  1. Two convex lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 respectively are placed in contact with each other. Then what will be the power of their equivalent lens?
  2. The refractive index of glass is 1.55. What is its polaris¬ ing angle? Determine the angle of refraction for the polarising angle

Answer:

1. Powers of the two lenses are P = \(=\frac{1}{f_1}\) and P = \(=\frac{1}{f_2}\)they are placed in contact, the power of the equivalent lens is

P = \(P_1+P_2=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}\)

2. tan ip = n or, ip = tan-1(1.55) = 57.2°

The angle of refraction,

r = 90°- ip = 90°- 57.2°

= 32.8

Physics Model Paper

Question 17.

  1. After that time will the direction of current in an electric supply line of frequency 50 Hz be reversed?
  2. Which physical quantity, has unit Wb. m-2 it scalar or vector?

Answer:

1. Time = \(\frac{T}{2}=\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{1}{50}\right)\)

= 0.01 s

2. A magnetic field, is a vector quantity

Model Paper Solutions

Question 18.

  1. How is the direction of a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) at a point related to the magnetic line of force passing through that point?
  2. A long straight wire of length l is moving within a uniform magnetic field B with a velocity v perpendicular to the field. How much emf will induce?

Answer:

1. Magnetic field B acts in the direction of the line of force.

2. Induced emf = Blv

Question 19. At which temperature is a semiconductor completely transformed into an insulator?
Answer: 0K

Question 20.

  1. On what condition does a convex lens produce real images of an object on a screen at two positions ofthe lens?
  2. Sunray, sodium light and headlight of an automobile-which of these lights are polarised

Answer:

1. The distance (D) between the object and the screen should be greater than four times the focal length of  (f) the convex lens. That is, D > 4f

2. None of the three is polarised

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. The dimension of electric potential is

  1. \(M L^2 T^2 A^{-1}\)
  2. \(M L^2 T^{-3} A^{-1}\)
  3. \(M L T^{-2} A^{-1}\)
  4. \(M L^2 T^3 A^{-1}\)

Answer: 2. \(M L^2 T^{-3} A^{-1}\)

Power, P = VI; so V = P/I

Dimension of V \(\frac{M L^2 \mathrm{~T}^{-3}}{\mathrm{~A}}=\mathrm{ML}^2 \mathrm{~T}^{-3} \mathrm{~A}^{-1}\)

Model Paper Solutions

Question 2. A wire is stretched by 1% but volume remains constant, then

  1. Resistivity increases by 1%
  2. Resistance increases by 2%
  3. Resistivity decreases by 1%
  4. Resistance decreases by 2%

Answer: 2. Resistance increases by 2%

Physics Model Paper

Volume, V = αl = constant, where a = cross-sectional area.

Resistivity does not change due to elongation.

Resistance, R = \(\rho \frac{l}{\alpha}=\rho \frac{l^2}{\alpha l}=\rho \frac{l^2}{V}\)

As p and V are constants,

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta R}{R}=2 \frac{\Delta l}{l}=2 \times 1 \%\)

= 2%

Question 3. The energy of an electron revolving around the nucleus of an H-atom is  1.51 eV. The angular momentum of this electron will be

  1. \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)
  2. \(\frac{2 h}{2 \pi}\)
  3. \(\frac{3 h}{2 \pi}\)
  4. \(\frac{4 h}{2 \pi}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{3 h}{2 \pi}\)

For ground state (n = 1) , E1 = -13.6eV

Given, En =  1.51eV

∴ \(\frac{E_1}{E_n}=\frac{-13.6}{-1.51}\)

= 9

As \(E_n \propto \frac{1}{n^2}\) we have n

= 3

Angular momentum of this electron = \(3 \frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

Model Paper Solutions

Question 4. The angle of dip is 90°N at

  1. Magnetic south pole
  2. Magnetic north pole
  3. Geographic south pole
  4. Geographic north pole

Answer: 2. Magnetic north pole

The angle of dip is 90°N at the magnetic north pole

Question 5. The equation of an ac is i = 3sinωt + 4cosωt. Then rms value of this current will be

  1. \(\frac{3}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{4}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  3. \(\frac{7}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{5}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Physics Model Paper

i = \(3 \sin \omega t+4 \cos \omega t=5\left[\frac{3}{5} \sin \omega t+\frac{4}{5} \cos \omega t\right]\)

Since \(\sqrt{3^2+4^2}=5\)

= 5 \((\sin \omega t \cos \theta+\cos \omega t \sin \theta)\)

= \(\text { where, } \theta=\cos ^{-1} \frac{3}{5}=\sin ^{-1} \frac{4}{5}\)

= 5 sin(ωt+θ)

∴ Peak value, i0 = 5 unit; rms value = \(\frac{i_0}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{5}{\sqrt{2}}\) unit

Question 6. A biconvex lens behaves like a convergent in air but behaves like a divergent in water. Then refractive index (μL) of the lens will be

  1. μL= 1
  2. μL > 1.33
  3. μL = 1-33
  4. 1<μL< 1.33

Answer: 4. 1<μL< 1.33

A biconvex lens is divergent when its refracting index is less than that of the surrounding medium

Model Paper Solutions

Question 7. The process in which the amplitude of the carrier wave is made proportional to the instantaneous amplitude of the signal wave is called

  1. Amplitude modulation
  2. Demodulation
  3. Rectification
  4. Amplification

Answer: 1. Amplitude modulation

Physics Model Paper

In the process of amplitude modulation, the amplitude of the carrier wave is made proportional to the instantaneous amplitude of the signal wave

Question 8. Two point charges separated by a distance d apart from each other with a repulsion force of 9 N. If the separation between them becomes 3d, the force of repulsion will

  1. 1N
  2. 3N
  3. 6N
  4. 27 N

Answer: 1. 1N

Force = \(\propto \frac{1}{d^2}\)

As the distance increases 3 times, the force decreases 9 times

Question 9. In the circuit AB = 6Ω, BC = 3HΩ, CD = 6Ω , DA = 12Ω, G = 10Ω. Current through galvanometer is

Physics Model Paper

Model Paper Current Through Galvanometer

  1. 8.7 mA
  2. 7.8 mA
  3. 8.7 A
  4. 0

Answer: 1.8.7 mA

As, \(\frac{6}{3}=\frac{12}{6}\) , the Wheatstone bridge is balanced

Model Paper Solutions

Question 10. +q point charge is placed at the centre of a hemispherical surface. The amount of electrical flux crossing through the surface will be

  1. \(\frac{q}{\epsilon_0}\)
  2. \(\frac{q}{2 \epsilon_0}\)
  3. \(\frac{q}{3 \epsilon_0}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 q}{\epsilon_0}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{q}{2 \epsilon_0}\)

Considering all directions, the total flux around the point charge = \(\frac{q}{\epsilon_0}\)

The hemispherical surface surrounds half the entire space. So the flux through the surface = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{q}{\epsilon_0}\)

Question 11. An α -particle and a proton having the same momentum enter into a region of uniform magnetic field and move in circular paths. The ratio of the radii of curvature of their circular paths  \(\frac{r_g}{r_p}\) in the field Is

  1. 1
  2. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
  4. 4

Answer: 3.\(\frac{1}{4}\)

The centripetal force for the rotation is supplied by the magnetic force on a moving particle.

Physics Model Paper

⇒ \(\frac{m v^2}{r}=q v B\)

Or, \(=\frac{m v^2}{q v B}=\frac{m v}{q B}\)

Hence for α -particle and proton, momentum mu and magnetic field B are the same.

⇒ \(\frac{r_\alpha}{r_p}=\frac{q_p}{q_\alpha}=\frac{+e}{+2 e}=\frac{1}{2}\)

Model Paper Solutions

Question 12. A straight conductor of length 0.5 m Is placed in a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) = (2i + 4J) T . It carries a current 1 A along +ve x-axis. The magnitude and direction of force acting on the conductor respectively are

  1. 2N along +ve z-axis
  2. √18 N along +ve z-axis
  3. 4 N along +ve y-axis
  4. √2  along +ve x-axis

Answer:  1. 2N along +ve z-axis

As this current I = 1 A is flowing in the positive x direction, the length vector of the conductor is,

⇒ \(\vec{l}=0.5 \hat{i} \mathrm{~m}\)

∴  Force, F = \(\vec{F}=\overrightarrow{I l} \times \vec{B}=1(0.5 \hat{i}) \times(2 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j})=2 \hat{k N}\)

Question 13. Two waves, whose intensities are 9: 16 are made to interfere. The ratio of maximum and minimum intensi¬ ties in the interference pattern is

  1. 49: 1
  2. 49: 16
  3. 7:1
  4. 4: 3

Answer:  1. 49: 1

Intensity ratio = 9: 16, so amplitude ratio =3:4.

∴ Ratio of maximum and minimum amplitudes after interference = (4 + 3): (4- 3) = 7:1

∴ The ratio of maximum and minimum intensities = 49: 1

Model Paper Solutions

Question 14.  If  V1 increases from 2 V to 6 V then a change of current will be

Model Paper Change Current

  1. Zero
  2. 20 mA
  3. \(\frac{80}{3}\) mA
  4. 40 mA

Answer: 2. 20 mA

For V1, = 2 V (reverse bias), current = 0

Physics Model Paper

For V2= 6 V (forward bias),

Current = \(\frac{(6-3) V}{150 \Omega}=\frac{1}{50}\)

= 20 mA

Change of current = (20-0) = 20mA

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Semiconductor Electronics Short Question And Answers

Semiconductors And Electronics Short Question And Answers

Question 1. Draw the voltage-current characteristics of a p-n junction and compare them with the characteristics of a resistor.
Answer:

Two characteristics are shown. Comparing them, we can say:

The ordinary resistor obeys Ohm’s law and hence its characteristic curve is linear, but the p-n junction does not obey Ohm’slaw.  Current can flow in any direction through an ordinary resistor, with the reverse bias of a p-n junction, the magnitude of the current is negligible

Question 2. In which kind of biasing of a p-n junction, do the net holes flow from the n -n-region to the p -p-region?

In the case of reverse biasing, the net flow of holes is from n -region to p -region. Because, in this case, the majority carrier holes in the p -p-region cannot enter the n -n-region, but the minority carrier holes can move easily from the n -n-region to the p -p-region

Read And Learn More WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

Question 3. Explain why the resistance of a semiconductor decreases with an increase in temperature.
Answer:

With the increase in temperature, a greater number of bonds inside the semiconductor are broken. Hence, a large number of electrons come out from those bonds. As a result, the number of charge carriers increases and consequently, the resistance decreases

Question 4. If the emitter and base of a transistor have the same doping concentration, how will the base current and the j collector current be affected?
Answer:

The base current will increase and the collector current j will decrease. Most of the majority carriers coming from the emitter will be neutralized in the base by electron-hole recombine nation. This results in a large base current. Only a few majority carriers will reach the collector, resulting in a small collector current.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Semiconductor Electronics Short Question And Answers

WBBSE Class 12 Semiconductor Electronics Short Q&A

Question 5. How will you test whether a transistor is damaged or not
Answer:

The resistance of the forward-biased emitter-base junction is low while that of the reverse-biased collector-base junction A damaged transistor, when checked by an AVO  meter will show low resistance for both junctions

Question 6.  Can two separate p-n junction diodes placed back to back be used to form a p-n-p transistor?
Answer:

No. When two p-n junction diodes are placed back to back, the n -n-region will form the base. This region will be of considerable thickness and doping will also be very high. For a transistor, the thickness of the base should be very small and as the doping. So two p-n junction diodes placed back to back cannot form a p-n-p transistor.

Question 7. In half-wave rectification, what is the output frequency if the input frequency is 50 Hz? What is the output frequency of a full-wave rectifier for the same input frequency?
Answer:

For a half-wave rectifier, the output frequency is equal to the input frequency. Output frequency = 50 Hz A full-wave rectifier rectifies both halves of the input AC.

∴  Output frequency = 2 × input frequency = 2 × 50 = 100 H

Question 8. What is the effect of doping on the depletion layer of a p-n junction?
Answer:

With the increase in the rate of doping, the thickness of the depletion layer generated at the junction decreases. Even if one part (p -part, say) of a p-n junction is heavily doped, the thickness of the depletion layer on that side (p -side) becomes less than that of the other side

Question 9. Why does the conductivity of a pure, semiconductor increase with temperature rise?
Answer:

The temperature of a pure semiconductor is increased, and some electrons acquire sufficient kinetic energy to break the bond and come out of the valance band. These elec¬ trons act as charge carriers inside the crystal. So, the conductivity of a pure semiconductor increases with rise in temperature

Short Questions on p-n Junction Diodes

Question 10. In which kind of biasing of a p-n junction, do the net holes flow from the n -n-region to the p-region?
Answer:

In the case of reverse biasing, the net flow of holes is from n -region to p -region. Because, in this case, the majority carrier holes in the p -p-region cannot enter the n -n-region, but the minority carrier holes can move easily from the n -n-region to the p -p-region

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 11. Explain why the resistance of a semiconductor decreases with an increase in temperature.
Answer:

With the increase in temperature, a greater number of bonds inside the semiconductor are broken. Hence, a large number of electrons come out from those bonds. As a result, the number of charge carriers increases and consequently, the resistance decreases

Question 12. To which factor is die pulsating nature of the output due?
Answer:

In the process of full wave rectification, the output current will be the same for each half cycle of the alternating current. As the Input voltage is sinusoidal, the BO pulsating nature of the output voltage occurs.

Question 13. In a transistor, the emitter-base junction is always forward-biased, while the collector-base junction is reverse-biased. Why?
Answer:

This bias system is the condition of the transistor to be active. As the emitter-base is forward biased, the input resistance i.e., the resistance of the emitter-base junction becomes very small. Again, as the collector-base junction is reverse biased, the output resistance i.e., the resistance of the emitter-collector becomes very high. The circuit with low input resistance and high output resistance acts as the best amplifier.

Question 14. Why does a photodiode function in reverse bias?
Answer:

In a reverse-biased photodiode, the electric current flows through it from negative to positive potential, which is similar to the current in an electric cell

Practice Short Questions on Logic Gates

Question 15. How is a light-emitting diode fabricated?
Answer:

In an LED, the upper layer of p-type semiconductors is deposited by diffusion on the n-type layer of the semiconductor. The metalized contacts are provided for applying the forward bias voltage to the p-n junction diode from the battery through a resistance that controls the brightness of light emitted

Question 16. In the following diagram, is the junction diode forward-biased or reverse-biased?

Semiconductors And Electrons Forward Biased Or Reverse Biased

Answer:

In the given diagram, the voltage at the p-side is less than the voltage at the n-side of the diode. So, the diode is reverse-biased.

Question 17. 

  1. In the following diagram, which bulb out of B1 and, B2 will glow and why?
  2. Explain briefly the three processes due to which generation of emf takes place in a solar cell.

Semiconductors And Electrons Bulb

Answer: 

1. Bulb B1, will glow as diode D1 is forward-biased. Bulb B2 will not glow as diode D2 is reverse-biased.

Question 18. Three processes due to which generation of emf takes place in a solar cell are:

  1. Generation of electron-hole pair* due to light, close to the junction
  2. Separation of electrons and holes due to the electric field of the depletion region. Electrons are swept to the n-side and holes to the p -the sides.
  3. The electrons reaching the n-side are collected by the front contact and holes reaching the side are collected by the back contact. Thus p -side becomes positive and the n-side becomes negative giving rise to photovoltage

Conceptual Short Questions on Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors

Question 19. In the following diagram’ S’ is a semiconductor. Would you increase or decrease the value of R to keep the reading of the ammeter A constant when S is heated Give a reason for your answer

Semiconductors And Electrons Semiconductor

We will increase the value of R. When semiconductor S U is heated, Its resistance decreases with a temperature rise. As the semiconductor S is connected in series, the net resistance of the circuit also decreases. So, by Increasing the value of R we can keep the resistance of the circuit constant and lienee the current in the circuit Le. The reading of ammeter A can be kept constant

Question 20. Name the junction diode whose 1-V characteristics are drawn below

Semiconductors And Electrons VI Characteristic For A Semiconductor

Answer:

The junction diode is a solar cell

Real-Life Scenarios Involving Semiconductor Devices Questions

Question 20. HOW is a light-emitting diode fabricated? Briefly, the state is working.
Answer:

In an LED, the upper layer of p-type semiconductors is deposited by diffusion on the n-type layer of the semiconductor. The metalized contacts are provided for applying the forward bias voltage to the p-n junction diode from the battery through a resistance that controls the brightness of light emitted.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Alternating Current

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Notes Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Alternating Current Direct Current Or DC And Alternating Current Or Ac

Before discussing alternating current thoroughly, it would be helpful to recapitulate on direct current in short.

Direct Current (dc): In an electrochemical cell, the electrical nature of the positive and negative electrodes remains unchanged, i.e., it does not vary with time. The current in a circuit from this cell always remains unidirectional.

  • This kind of current is known as direct current or unidirectional current However, despite being unidirectional, the magnitude of the current may decrease or increase with time.
  • In the graphs, different kinds of direct current concerning time are shown. Of these, the current shown in the is steady current the magnitude of current in this case always remains unchanged.

Alternating Current Different Kinds Of Direct Current With Respect To Time

Alternating Current (ac): An electrochemical cell does not provide large amounts of electrical energy. All electric power plants use a machine called a dynamo or generator for this purpose.

  • The characteristics of this machine are—the electrical nature of its two electrodes does not remain constant, but changes from positive to negative, and from negative to positive periodically.
  • As a result, current through the external circuit connected to this source gets reversed periodically, i.e., the flow of current does not remain unidirectional.
  • The electromotive force obtained from this source is called alternating emf and the current in the circuit is called alternating current.
  • All modern electrical appliances, simple or delicate, are enabled. Hence the importance of the study of ac. Current-time graphs of some alternating currents are shown.

Read and Learn More Class 12 Physics Notes

Alternating Current Current Time Graphs Of Some Alternating Currents

The following characteristics of alternating current are to be noted.

  1. An alternating current is of a wave nature.
  2. The magnitude of the current above the time axis is taken as positive, and that below is taken as negative. This implies that the direction of the current gets reversed periodically, and at the moment of this transition, the instantaneous magnitude of the current becomes zero.
  3. The waveforms of different alternating currents may be different. The waveforms of the three different currents shown are respectively sinusoidal, square, and triangular. Of them, the discussion about the sinusoidal waveform is of particular importance; because, by appropriate mathematical analysis, the square, triangular, or any other waveform can be reduced to a combination of a large number of sinusoidal waves.

Alternating Current Source Of Alternating Current Ac Dynamo

Almost the entire electrical energy requirement of the present-day world is derived from the phenomenon of electromagnetic induction.

The machine employing this phenomenon is called a dynamo or generator. A conducting coil is set to rotate inside a magnetic field, as a result of which a current is induced in the coil. This is the basic mechanism.

Definition: The machine in which the mechanical energy of a rotating conducting coil placed in a magnetic field is converted into electrical energy, is called a dynamo or generator.

Description: The main parts of an alternating current dynamo are shown.

Alternating Current Dynamo Or Generator

N, S: The poles of a strong horseshoe magnet which produces a uniform magnetic field directed from the north to the south pole in the gap between them. Some lines of force are shown in the figure. This magnet is called the field magnet.

ABCD: A rectangular coil called an armature is placed in a uniform magnetic field, which usually contains several turns.

The coil in this case is made to rotate about the axis normal to the magnetic field; the direction of rotation in this case is as shown in the diagram.

R1, R2: Two smooth brass rings called slip rings. They are connected to the coil at its open ends A and D.

T1, T2: Two carbon brushes fitted to the rings with the help of springs, which keep the brushes pressed against the rings R1 and R2.

L: An electric lamp, to indicate the presence of current.

Observation: The lamp glows as long as the coil rotates. From this, we can infer that an electric current is flowing through the external circuit attached to T1 and T2. As soon as the rotation of the coil ceases, the current stops and the lamp goes out.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Alternating Current

WBBSE Class 12 Alternating Current Notes

Working Principle: when the coil ABCD arms AB and CD intersect the magnetic lines of force. As a result, electromagnetic induction takes place.

  • At a certain moment, when the motion of the arm AB is downwards, according to Fleming’s right-hand rule, a current will be induced in the direction BA. At the same time due to the upward motion of the arm CD, the direction of induced current will be along DC.
  • So, a current will be set up in the direction of DCBA in the coil and will flow from T1 to T2 in the external circuit In this situation T1 and T2 behave as the positive and negative poles of a battery, respectively.
  • Here, arms BC and AD do not intersect the magnetic lines of force.
  • When, after half-rotation, the positions of the arms AB and CD are interchanged, by applying Fleming’s right-hand rule, it is observed that current is now induced in the direction ABCD.

As a result, current flows in the second half of rotation from T2 to T1 in the external circuit. Thus, the polarities of T1 and T2 get reversed, reversing the direction of the current.

  • This reversal of the direction of the current goes on periodically. Every time the coil crosses its vertical position, the direction of the current gets reversed. Hence, this dynamo is called an AC dynamo.
  • Because the heating effect of electric current {αI2, i.e., the same for +I and -I) does not depend on the direction of current, the lamp continues to glow as long as the coil rotates.
  • If a DC galvanometer (for example., a moving coil galvanometer) is placed instead of the electric lamp, no deflection of its pointer would be observed.

Factors Affecting The Emf And Current: The electromotive force, and hence the current is directly proportional to

  1. Area of the coil,
  2. Number of turns of the coil,
  3. speed of rotation of the coil and
  4. Strength of the magnetic field.

So, if any one of them is increased, the emf will also increase. The current however will decrease with an increase in the resistance of the circuit.

Electric motor: The principle of action of an electric motor is just opposite to that of a dynamo.

  • A motor is a device in which a current-carrying coil, placed suitably in a magnetic field, rotates on the principle of action of magnets on currents.
  • A motor converts the electrical energy of the coil into its mechanical energy.

Differences Between Dynamo And Motor:

Alternating Current Differences Between Dynamo Amd Motor

However, the discussions on both DC and AC motors are beyond our present syllabus.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Notes

Alternating Current Variation Of Alternating Current

Waveform Of Alternating Current: Let a rectangular. coil ABCD is rotating with uniform angular velocity in a uniform magnetic field. The coil is viewed in a way such that only the AD end of the coil becomes visible. The different positions of this end concerning time are shown.

Alternating Current Waveform Of Alternating Current

Let the period of the coil be T. If the coil starts rotating from its vertical position, then at \(\frac{T}{2}\) and T, it again comes to its vertical position.

At these moments both AB and CD are moving parallel to the magnetic field. Considering the equation, e = Blvsind with θ = 0° the induced emf and hence the induced current will be zero.

On the other hand, at the times \(\frac{T}{4}\) and \(\frac{3T}{4}\), the coil lies horizontally. At those positions,r. AB and CD are directed normally to the magnetic field (θ = 90°), and the induced current becomes maximum.

However, at the time \(\frac{T}{4}\), the direction of current is along DCBA, while at the time \(\frac{3T}{4}\), it is along ABCD. So, if the current in the first case is taken as positive, then the current in the second case will be negative.

This figure clearly shows a sine-wave; this is the wave nature of current if the coil starts rotating from its vertical position.

On the other hand, if the coil, starts rotating from its horizontal position, the current Will be a cosine-wave. Note that, both sine and cosine waves are called sinusoidal waves.

The current completes a cycle of change in a time equal to the period of rotation of the coil. A complete wave is thus formed in every cycle.

Expression Of Alternating Current: Let a rectangular coil be rotating with uniform angular velocity ω in a uniform. magnetic field B. At any moment t, the angle between the normal to the coil and the direction of the magnetic field is θ, say.

If the area of the plane of the coil is A, the magnetic flux linked with the coil,

Φ = BAcosθ → (1)

Alternating Current Expression Of Alternating Current

Initially, the angle between the normal to the plane of the coil and the direction of the magnetic field = α (say). After rotation for time t, this angle becomes,

θ = ωt + α

So, from equation (1) we get, magnetic flux,

Φ= BA cos (ωt+α) → (2)

Hence, the magnitude of the induced emf in the coil of a single turn

⇒ \(e=\frac{d \phi}{d t}=\omega B A \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\)

For N turns,

⇒ \(e=\omega B A N \sin (\omega t+\alpha)=e_0 \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\) → (3)

[here, e0 = ωBAN]

If the total resistance of the coil and the external circuit is R, the induced current,

⇒ \(i=\frac{e}{R}=\frac{\omega B A N}{R} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)=\frac{e_0}{R} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\)

⇒ i0sin(ωt + α) → (4)

Phase: The state of alternating current at any moment is expressed by its phase. In equations (3) and (4), (ωt + α) is the phase of the alternating current.

Phase Difference: If the phases of two alternating currents are δ1 and δ2, then(δ12) is the phase difference of those two currents.

If co is the same for the two currents, the phase difference
becomes (α1– α2)

Peak Value: As -1 ≤ sinθ ≤ 1, it can be concluded that

  • The maximum and minimum values of the electromotive force are e0 and -e0 respectively.
  • Accordingly, the maximum and minimum values of the current are i0 and -i0.

These magnitudes, e0 and i0 are called the peak values of electromotive force and current.

Dependence Of Peak Value On Different Factors: it is obvious from equations (3) and (4) that the peak values of emf as well as current depend directly on each of the quantities involved, viz., co, B, A, N. Moreover, the peak value of current also varies inversely with the resistance (R) of the circuit.

Period And Frequency: The definite time interval in which a complete cycle repeats itself, is called the period (T) of an alternating current.

If the angular velocity, of the coil, is co, then

∴ \(T=\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) → (5)

The number of complete waves produced in unit time is called the frequency (n) of an alternating current.

So, \(n=\frac{1}{T}=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\) → (6)

Frequency is the most important quantity in the expression of an ac. It is noted that the frequency of domestic electric supply in India is 50 Hz or 50 cycles per second(cps). It indicates that the direction of the current is reversed (50 x 2) or 100 times per second.

Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Notes

Alternating Current Circuit Symbol Of An AC Source

It represents the symbols of an AC source used in a circuit. Any of these symbols may be used for the purpose.

Alternating Current Circuit Symbol Of Ac Source

Average Values Of Alternating Voltage And Current

Alternating voltage (V) or Current (I) always increases, decreases, and changes periodically following the functions since or cos ωt. But the average values of these quantities, do riot change with time.

Calculation: Let an expression for sinusoidal alternating voltage,

V = V0 Sin ωt

Average value of it in a full cycle (i.e., for t = T)

= \(\frac{1}{T} \int_0^T V d t=\frac{1}{T} \int_0^T V_0 \sin \omega t d t=0\)

This is because the voltage in a half cycle is positive and in the next half it is of the same magnitude, but negative.

Alternating Current Average Values Of Alternating Voltage And Current

Short Notes on AC Circuits

For convenience, the average value in a half-cycle, instead of in a full-cycle, in ac is considered as the average value \((\bar{V})\) of an alternating voltage.

∴ \(\bar{V}=\frac{1}{T / 2} \int_0^{T / 2} V_0 \sin \omega t d t=\frac{2 V_0}{\omega T}[-\cos \omega t]_0^{T / 2}\)

= \(\frac{2 V_0}{\pi}=0.637 V_0\)

Similarly, the average value of alternating current,

∴ \(\bar{I}=\frac{2 I_0}{\pi}=0.637 I_0\)

Class 12 Physics Alternating Current notes RMS Values Of Alternating Voltage And Current

Alternating voltage or current cannot be measured directly with instruments like galvanometers. They can only be measured indirectly following the thermal effect of current.

We know that heat generated in a current-carrying conductor is directly proportional to V2 or l2, i.e., heat thus generated does not depend on the direction of the current.

  • Due to the periodical changes of an alternating current, the heat in the conductor fluctuates from zero to a certain positive value. Hence the average value of heat should be proportional to the average value of V2 or I2.
  • The value most commonly used for an ac is its effective value. The effective value of ac is the amount of ac that produces the same heating effect as an equal amount of dc.
  • This is calculated by squaring all the amplitudes of the sine wave over one period, taking the average of these values, and then taking the square root.

The effective value, being the root of the average (or mean) of the square of the currents, is known as the root mean square (in short, rms) value.

Calculation: Let an expression for sinusoidal alternating voltage,

v = v0 sinωt

So, the mean square of V,

∴ \(\vec{V}^2=\frac{1}{T} \int_0^T V^2 d t=\frac{1}{T} \int_0^T \cdot V_0^2 \sin ^2 \omega t d t\)

= \(\frac{V_0^2}{2 T} \int_0^T(1-\cos 2 \omega t) d t=\frac{V_0^2}{2 T}\left[t-\frac{\sin 2 \omega t}{2 \dot{\omega}}\right]_0^T\)

= \(\frac{V_0^2}{2 T}\left(T-\frac{\sin 4 \pi}{2 \omega}+\frac{\sin 0}{2 \omega}\right)\) [∵ ωt = 2π]

= \(\frac{v_0^2}{2}\)

∴ rms value of V,

⇒ \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=\sqrt{\bar{V}^2}=\sqrt{\frac{V_0^2}{2}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}=0.707 V_0\)

Similarly, rms value of I,

⇒ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}=0.707 I_0\)

i.e., rms voltage = 70.7% of peak voltage

and rms current = 70.7% of peak current

Relation between peak value, average value, and rms value of alternating voltage and current: From the above discussion we have,

⇒ \(\bar{V}=\frac{2 V_0}{\pi}=0.637 V_0\)

and \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}=0.707 V_0\)

where V0 is the peak value of alternating voltage.

∴ \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}: \bar{V}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}: \frac{2 V_0}{\pi}=\frac{\pi}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

or, \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{\pi}{2 \sqrt{2}} \bar{V}=1.11 \bar{V}\)

∴ \(V_{\text {rms }}>\bar{V}\)

Similarly, \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}>\bar{I}\)

This relation is shown graphically.

Alternating Current Alternating Voltage And Current

We know that the heating effect of electric current is directly proportional to I2. Hence ac ammeters and ac voltmeters, are designed based on the heating effect of current. They directly measure rms values of alternating current and voltage respectively.

Form Factor: The ratio of the rms value and the average value of alternating voltage or current is known as the form factor.

Thus form factor, \(f=\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\bar{V}}=\frac{\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}}{\frac{2 V_0}{\pi}}=\frac{\pi}{2 \sqrt{2}}=1.11\).

Note that, the above value of form factor applies only to sinusoidal voltage arid current. For different waveforms, the values of the form factor are different. For example, for a square wave

∴ \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=V_0 \text { and } \bar{V}=V_0\)

∴ Form factor, \(f=\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\bar{V}}=1\)

From the form factor of an alternating voltage or current an effective idea about the waveform can be obtained.

Effects Of Oil An Ac Or DC Currents On The Human Body: the three main factors that determine what kind of shock one experiences are the amplitude, frequency, and duration of the current passing through the body.

Direct current has zero frequency i.e., it has a constant amplitude. On the other hand, the peak value of an ac voltage (V0) is √2. times its rms value (Vrms), for example., a 220V ac supply is going 220√2 or 311 V (approx.) before coming down to zero.

So, one can get a 311V shock from a 220V-50Hz ac supply line for (50 x 2) hor 100 times per second. The calculation indicates the severity of electrocution from ac compared to that from the decision of average for the same duration of time.

Class 12 Physics Alternating Current notes

Alternating Current Circuit Symbol Of An AC Source Numerical Examples

Example 1. Equation of an ac is \(I=, 10 \sin \left(200 \pi t-\frac{\pi}{15}\right)\) ampere. Determine the frequency and peak value of the current.

Solution:

Comparing with the general equation of ac, I = I0 sin(ωt + α) we get,

the peak value of current, I0 = 10 A

and angular frequency, ω = 200 π Hz

∴ Frequency, \(I=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}=\frac{200 \pi}{2 \pi}=100 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Example 2. If an ac is represented by I = 100 sin 200 πt ampere, determine the peak value of the current and period.

Solution:

Comparing with the general equation of ac, I = I0 sin(ωt+α) we get,

the peak value of current, I0 = 100 A

and angular frequency, ω = 200π HZ

∴ Time period, T = \(T=\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}=\frac{2 \pi}{200 \pi}=0.01 \mathrm{~s}\)

Example 3. An alternating current having a peak value of 141 A Is used to heat a metal wire. To produce the same rate of heating effect, another constant current IA is used. What is the value of I?

Solution:

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{141 \mathrm{~A}}{\sqrt{2}}=100 \mathrm{~A}\)

If a steady DC I produces the same rate of heating, then I = Irms = 100A.

Example 4. The peak value of an alternating magnetic field B is 0.01 T and the frequency is 100 Hz. If a conducting ring of radius 1 m is held normal to the field, what emf will be induced in the ring?

Solution:

n = 100 Hz

∴ Time period, \(T=\frac{1}{n}=\frac{1}{100} \mathrm{~s}\)

The time taken by the field to increase from 0T to, 0.01 T is \(\frac{T}{4}=\frac{1}{400} \mathrm{~s}\).

Now the area, A = π. m2 = π m2

Hence induced emf,

∴ \(|e|=\frac{d \phi}{d t}=\frac{d}{d t}(B A)=A \frac{d B}{d t}\)

or, \(|e|=\pi\left(\frac{0.01-0}{\frac{1}{400}}\right)=4 \pi \mathrm{V}=12.57 \mathrm{~V}\)

Class 12 Physics Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Alternating Current Power Consumed In Ac Circuits Some Important Ac Circuits

Power consumed In ac circuits: In any dc circuit, the potential difference (voltage) and the current are always in phase. But this is not so for ac circuits—in general, a phase difference is evolved between the voltage and the current Mathematically the voltage V and the current I are expressed as,

V = V0 sinωt and I = I0 sin(ωt-θ)

where, θ = phase difference between the voltage and the current. θ always lies between -90° and +90°, i.e., -90° ≤ θ ≤ 90°. Then, power consumed (or power dissipated) in the circuit is,

∴ \(P=V I=V_0 I_0 \sin \omega t \sin (\omega t-\theta)\)

= \(V_0 I_0 \sin \omega t[\sin \omega t \cos \theta-\cos \omega t \sin \theta]\)

=\(V_0 I_0\left[\sin ^2 \omega t \cos \theta-\sin \omega t \cos \omega t \sin \theta\right]\)

= \(V_0 I_0\left[\sin ^2 \omega t \cos \theta-\frac{1}{2} \sin 2 \omega t \sin \theta\right]\)

Over a complete cycle, the average of \(\sin ^2 \omega t=\frac{1}{2}\) and that of sin2ωt = 0. So the average power of the circuit is,

∴ \(\bar{P}=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}} \frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}} \cos \theta=V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \theta\)

No experiment can measure the instantaneous power P; every measurement leads to the average power \(\bar{P}\). This \(\bar{P}\) is referred to as the effective power, and is usually denoted by the simple symbol P. So the effective power (or true power) of an ac circuit is,

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \theta\) → (1)

Common Questions on Alternating Current

Power Factor: The factor cosθ in equation (1) is vitally important; this factor arises, clearly, due to the voltage-current phase difference θ. This cosθ is called the power factor of an ac circuit.

  • If θ ≠ 0, cos θ< 1; so the power factor, in general, reduces the power consumed in an ac circuit to some extent Also, as -90°≤ θ ≤ 90°, the power factor cosθ is never negative; as a result, the power consumed in the circuit can never be negative.
  • The unit of power P is watt (W); to distinguish between P and the product Vrms Irms, watt is never used as the unit of VrmsIrms — the usual unit of this product is volt. ampere or V.A.
  • Incidentally, from the similarity with the dc expression P = VI, the product Vrms Irms is often called the apparent power of an ac circuit. Clearly,

true power = apparent power x power factor.

If voltage and current are in the same phase, then θ = 0 and cos θ = 1. In this condition, an ac circuit consumes the maximum power.

If the voltage and the current are either -90° or +90° out of phase, then cos θ = 0 and P = 0. An ac circuit of this type consumes no power. The corresponding current is referred to as wattless current.

Time Interval Between The Peak Values Of Voltage And Current:

v = v0 sinωt, I = I0sin(ωt-θ)

So, \(V=V_0, \text { when } \omega t=\frac{\pi}{2}, \text { i.e., } t=\frac{\pi}{2 \omega}\)

Similarly, \(I=I_0 \text {, when }\left(\omega t^{\prime}-\theta\right)=\frac{\pi}{2} \text {, i.e., } t^{\prime}=\frac{\pi}{2 \omega} 4 \frac{\theta}{\omega}\)

Thus, the minimum time interval between the peak values of ac voltage and current is,

∴ \(t_0=t^{\prime}-t=\frac{\theta}{\omega}\)

WBCHSE Physics Alternating Current study material Purely Resistive Circuit

shows the circuit. Alternating voltage applied in the circuit,

Alternating Current Purely Resistive Circuit

V = V0sinω t → (1)

Here, the peak value of alternating voltage = v0

rms value, vrms = \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}} ; \text { frequency, } f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\).

According to Ohm’s law,

⇒ \(I=\frac{V}{R}=\frac{V_0}{R} \sin \omega t\)

Or, \(I=I_0 \sin \omega t\)

So, the peak value of ac, \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{R}\)

⇒ rms value, \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2} R}=\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{R}\);

⇒ frequency, \(f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\)

The factor sinωt in equations (1) and (2) indicates that

  1. Voltage and current are in phase;
  2. There is no change in frequency in this type of circuit.

Alternating Current Purely Resistive Circuit According To Ohms Law

Practice Problems on Alternating Current

Power in the circuit: Phase difference between voltage and current, θ = 0; so, power factor, cosθ = 1. For this, maximum power is consumed in a purely resistive circuit, which is

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=\frac{1}{2}\left(I_0 R\right) I_0 \cdot 1=\frac{1}{2} I_0^2 R=\left(\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\right)^2 R\)

i.e., P = Irms2.R → (3)

Purely Inductive Circuit

shows this circuit. Let the alternating voltage applied in the circuit be,

Alternating Current Purely Inductive Circuit

V = V0sin ωt → (1)

If the instantaneous change of current in the circuit is dl, the emf induced in the two ends of the inductor = \(-L \frac{d I}{d t}\)

This emf reduces the main voltage in the circuit. For this the effective voltage of the circuit = \(V_0 \sin \omega t-L \frac{d I}{d t}\).

A purely inductive circuit has no resistance i.e., R = 0. So according to Ohm’s law,

⇒ \(V_0 \sin \omega t-L \frac{d I}{d t}=0 \quad \text { or, } \frac{d I}{d t}=\frac{V_0}{L} \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\int d I=\int \frac{V_0}{L} \sin \omega t d t\)

or, \(I=-\frac{V_0}{\omega L} \cos \omega t+k\) [k = integration constant] → (2)

Dimensionally k is the same as I. Also, fc is a time-independent quantity. As the source voltage oscillates symmetrically about zero, the current also oscillates symmetrically about zero. For this, no constant or time-independent current can flow through the circuit, i.e., k = 0.

∴ \(I=-\frac{V_0}{\omega L} \cos \omega t=+\frac{V_0}{\omega L} \sin \left(\omega t-90^{\circ}\right)\)

or, I = I0sin(ωt-90°) →(3)

where \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{\omega L}\) = peak value of current.

From the equations (1) and (3) we come to the conclusions

current lags behind the voltage by 90°.

Alternating Current Circuit Lags Behind The Voltage

The quantity coL plays the same role in an inductive circuit as the resistance R in a resistive circuit. This quantity (i.e., ωL) is known as the inductive reactance of an ac circuit. Inductive reactance is the opposition offered by an inductor to the flow of alternating current through it. It is denoted by the symbol XL.

Hence for the above circuit,

XL = ωL = inductive reactance

Similar to that of R its unit is also ohm (Ω).

Power In The Circuit: Phase difference between voltage and current, θ = 90°, so, power factor, cosθ = 0.

Therefore, power consumption, \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=0\)

The current I in this circuit is wattless.

WBCHSE Physics Alternating Current study material Purely Capacitive Circuit

shows the circuit. Alternating voltage applied in the circuit,

V = V0sin ωt →(1)

At any moment, if Q is the charge stored in the capacitor C, then its terminal potential difference is \(\frac{Q}{C}\)

This potential difference opposes the applied instantaneous voltage in the circuit.

Alternating Current Purely Capacitive Circuit

So, the effective voltage of the circuit, \(V_e=V_0 \sin \omega t-\frac{Q}{C}\)

As there is no resistance in the circuit, according to Ohm’s law, Ve = IR = 0

and hence, \(V_e=V_0 \sin \omega t-\frac{Q}{C}=0\)

or, Q = CV0sinωt → (2)

Therefore alternating current,

∴ \(I=\frac{d Q}{d t}=\omega C V_0 \cos \omega t=\omega C V_0 \sin \left(\omega t+90^{\circ}\right)\)

= I0sin(ωt+90°) → (3)

Where, \(I_0=\omega C V_0=\frac{V_0}{1 / \omega C}=\frac{V_0}{X_C}\) = peak value of current From the equations (1) and (3) we come to the conclusions

Current leads the applied voltage by 90°;

The quantity \(\frac{1}{\omega C}\)plays the same role in a capacitive circuit as the resistance R in a resistive circuit. This quantity (i.e., \(\frac{1}{\omega C}\) is known as capacitive reactance (XC).

Capacitive reactance is the opposition offered by a capacitor to the flow of alternating current through it. Hence for the above circuit.

∴ \(x_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}\) = capacity reactance

Similar to that of R or XL, its unit is also ohm (Ω).

Alternating Current Current Leads To Applied Voltage

Power In The Circuit: Phase’ difference between voltage and current, θ = -90°; so, power factor, cosθ = 0. Therefore, power consumption \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=0\).

Here again, this current is wathers.

Wattless or Idle current: Power consumed in an ac circuit, \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta\). Now the phase difference between voltage and current in a pure inductive circuit, θ = 90°.

So power in the circuit is zero. On the other hand phase difference between voltage and current in a pure capacitive circuit, θ = -90°.

So, again power is equal to zero, which means, a purely inductive or capacitive circuit does not dissipate any power; current through the inductor or capacitor is hence called wattless or idle current.

LR Circuit

shows the circuit

Alternating Current LR Circuit

The applied alternating voltage,

V = V0sinωt → (1)

If the instantaneous change in current in of the circuit is dl, then the induced emf in the inductor \(L=-L \frac{d I}{d t}\);

i.e., the effective voltage in the circuit,

⇒ \(V_e=V_0 \sin \omega t-L \frac{d I}{d t}\)

According to Ohm’s law, Ve = IR, where the resistance, if any, of the inductor L is included in R.

∴ \(V_0 \sin \omega t-L \frac{d I}{d t}=I R\)

or, \(L \frac{d I}{d t}+R I=V_0 \sin \omega t\) → (2)

Let I = I0sin(ωt+ α)

or, \(\frac{d I}{d t}=\omega I_0 \cos (\omega t+\alpha)\)

So, putting the values of I and \(\frac{d I}{d t}\) in identity (2) we get

ωLI0 cos(ωt+α) + RI0 sin(ωt+α) = V0 sinωt

or, I0{R sin((ωt+ α) + L cos(ωt+α)} = V0 sinωt

or, \(I_0 \sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}\{\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)+\frac{\omega L}{\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}} \cos (\omega t+\alpha)\}=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(I_0 Z\left\{\frac{R}{Z} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)+\frac{\omega L}{Z} \cos (\omega t+\alpha)\right\}=V_0 \sin \omega t \text { [where } Z=\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2} \text { ] }\)

or, \(I_0 Z\{\sin (\omega t+\alpha) \cos \theta+\cos (\omega t+\alpha) \sin \theta\}=V_0 \sin \omega t \text { [where } \cos \theta=\frac{R}{Z} \text { and } \sin \theta=\frac{\omega L}{Z} \text { ] } \)

or, I0Zsin(ωt+ α + θ) = V0sin ωt

From this identity, comparing both sides we get,

⇒ \(I_0 Z=V_0 \quad \text { or, } I_0=\frac{V_0}{Z}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}}\)

and α + θ = 0 or, α = -θ

So, the ac in the circuit,

∴ \(I=I_0 \sin (\omega t-\theta)=\frac{V_0}{Z} \sin (\omega t-\theta)\) → (3)

From equations (1) and (3) we conclude,

The current lags behind the applied voltage by a phase angle θ given by \(\tan \theta=\frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}=\frac{\omega L}{Z} \times \frac{Z}{R}=\frac{\omega L}{R}\)

i.e., \(\theta=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{\omega L}{R}\right)\)

This phase relation is shown. We know that in a purely resistive circuit V and I are in the same phase i.e., phase difference, θ = 0. On the other hand, in a pure inductive circuit, I always lag behind V by θ = 90°. So in an LR circuit, I should lag behind V by 0 < θ < 90°.

In this circuit, Z plays the same role as R in a pure resistive circuit. Z is known as the impedance of an ac circuit.

Impedance, \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}=\sqrt{R^2+\left(X_L\right)^2}\) → (4)

where, XL = ωL = inductive reactance

Alternating Current Phase Relation

Impedance in an LR circuit is the effective resistance of the circuit arising from the combined effects of ohmic resistance and inductive reactance.

We can express the relation among R, XL, and Z with a suitable right-angled triangle. This triangle is called the impedance triangle.

Note that, R, ωL, and Z have, the same unit ohm(Ω).

Alternating Current Impedance Triangle

Power In The Circuit: 

Here, the power factor of the circuit, \(\cos \theta=\frac{R}{Z}\)

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_o \cos \theta=\frac{1}{2}\left(I_0 Z\right) I_0 \cdot \frac{R}{Z}=\frac{1}{2} I_0^2 R=\left(\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\right)^2 R\)

i.e., \(P=I_{\mathrm{rms}}^2 R\)

This means that the power is dissipated only in the resistance R. Current through the inductor is wattless.

CR Circuit

It shows the circuit. Alternating voltage applied to the circuit,

Alternating Current CR Circuit

V = V0sin ωt → (1)

At any moment if Q is the charge stored in the capacitor C, then, the effective voltage in the circuit,

∴ \(V_e=V_0 \sin \omega t-\frac{Q}{C}\)

According to Ohm’s law

∴ \(V_0 \sin \omega t-\frac{Q}{C}=I R\)

or, \(R I+\frac{1}{C} Q=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

Now let us assume that Q = Q0 sin(ωt+ α)

∴ \(I=\frac{d Q}{d t}=\omega Q_0 \cos (\omega t+\alpha)\)

So, from the equation (2) we get,

∴ \(\omega R Q_0 \cos (\omega t+\alpha)+\frac{1}{C} Q_0 \sin (\omega t+\alpha)=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\omega Q_0\left[R \cos (\omega t+\alpha)+\frac{1}{\omega C} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\right]=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z\left[\frac{R}{Z} \cos (\omega t+\alpha)+\frac{1 /(\omega C)}{Z} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\right]=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

[where \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)(say)]

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z\{\cos (\omega t+\alpha) \cdot \cos \theta+\sin (\omega t+\alpha) \cdot \sin \theta\}=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

[where \(\frac{R}{Z}=\cos \theta \text { and } \frac{1 / \omega C}{Z}=\sin \theta\)(say)]

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z \cos (\omega t+\alpha-\theta)=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z \sin \left(\omega t+\alpha-\theta+90^{\circ}\right)=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

Comparing both sides we get,

∴ \(\omega Q_0 Z=V_0 \quad \text { or, } Q_0=\frac{V_0}{\omega Z}\)

and α – θ + 90° = 0 or, α = θ – 90°

So, alternating current in the circuit,

I = ωQ0cos(ωt+ α)

= \(\omega \frac{V_0}{\omega Z} \cos \left(\omega t+\theta-90^{\circ}\right)=\frac{V_0}{Z} \sin (\omega t+\theta)\)

i.e., \(I=I_0 \sin (\omega t+\theta)=\frac{V_0}{Z} \sin (\omega t+\theta)\) → (3)

Here, \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{Z}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}}\)

From equations (1) and (3) we conclude the following.

1. The current I leads the voltage V by a phase angle θ, where \(\tan \theta=\frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}=\frac{1 / \omega C}{Z} \times \frac{Z}{R}=\frac{1}{\omega C R}\),

i.e., \(\theta=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\omega C R}\right)\)

This phase relation is shown. We know that in a purely resistive circuit, V and I are in the same phase, i.e., phase difference, θ = 0. On the other hand, in a pure capacitive circuit, I always lead V by θ = 90°. So, in a CR circuit, I should lead V by 0 < θ < 90°.

Alternating Current I n A Pure Capacitive Circuit

2. Z plays the same role as R in a pure resistive circuit. This Z is known as the impedance of the circuit.

Impendance, \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}=\sqrt{R^2+X_C^2}\) → (4)

where \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}\) = capacitive reactance.

Impedance in a CR circuit is the effective resistance of the circuit arising from the combined effects of ohmic resistance and capacitive reactance.

shows the impedance triangle for the circuit.

Alternating Current Impedance In A CR Circuit

Power In The Circuit: Here, the power factor of the circuit, \(\cos \theta=\frac{R}{Z}\)

so, \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=\frac{1}{2}\left(I_0 Z\right) I_0 \cdot \frac{R}{Z}=\frac{1}{2} I_0^2 R=\left(\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\right)^2 R\)

∴ P = I2rms.R2

Hence, power is dissipated only in the resistance R . Current through the capacitor C is wattless.

Series LCR Circuit

shows the circuit. Alternating voltage applied in the circuit,

V = V0sin ωt → (1)

If the instantaneous change in current in the circuit is dI, then the emf induced in the inductor

= \(-L \frac{d I}{d t}\).

Alternating Current Series LCR Circuit

On the other hand, if Q is the instantaneous charge stored in the capacitor, the opposite emf thus developed in the circuit = \(-\frac{Q}{C}\).

So, the effective voltage in the circuit,

∴ \(V_e=V_0 \sin \omega t-L \frac{d I}{d t}-\frac{Q}{C}\)

According to Ohm’s law,

∴ \(V_0 \sin \omega t-L \frac{d I}{d t}-\frac{Q}{C}=I R\)

or, \(L \frac{d I}{d t}+R I+\frac{Q}{C}=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

Now, let us assume, Q = Q0sin(ωt+ α)

So, current, \(I=\frac{d Q}{d t}=\omega Q_0 \cos (\omega t+\alpha)\)

or, \(\frac{d I}{d t}=-\omega^2 Q_0 \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\)

Putting these values in equation (2) we get,

= \(-\omega^2 L Q_0 \sin (\omega t+\alpha)+\omega R Q_0 \cos (\omega t+\alpha)+\frac{Q_0}{C} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\omega Q_0\left\{R \cos (\omega t+\alpha)-\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right) \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\right\}=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z\left\{\frac{R}{Z} \cos (\omega t+\alpha)-\frac{\omega L-1 / \omega C}{Z} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\right\}=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

[Where \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)]

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z\{\cos (\omega t+\alpha) \cos \theta-\sin (\omega t+\alpha) \sin \theta\}=V_0 \sin \omega t=\)

[Where \(\frac{R}{Z}=\cos \theta \text { and } \frac{\omega L-1 / \omega C}{Z}=\sin \theta\)]

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z \cos (\omega t+\alpha+\theta)=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

or, \(\omega Q_0 Z \sin \left(\omega t+\alpha+\theta+90^{\circ}\right)=V_0 \sin \omega t\)

Comparing both sides we get,

⇒ \(\omega Q_0 Z=V_0 \quad \text { or, } Q_0=\frac{V_0}{\omega Z}\)

and α + θ + 90° = 0 or, α = -θ-90°

Then, cos(ωt+α) = cos(ωt- θ – 90°) = sin(ωt – θ)

So, alternating current in the circuit,

⇒ \(I=\omega Q_0 \cos (\omega t+\theta)\)

= \(\frac{V_0}{Z} \sin (\omega t-\theta)=I_0 \sin (\omega t-\theta)\) → (3)

Here \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{Z}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}}\) → (4)

From equations (1) and (3) we conclude,

Current lags behind voltage by a phase angle θ where \(\tan \theta=\frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}=\frac{\frac{(\omega L-1 / \omega C)}{Z}}{\frac{R}{\bar{Z}}}=\frac{\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}}{R}\)

i.e., \(\theta=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}}{R}\right)\) → (5)

This phase relation is shown. Now if VL < VC i.e., \(\omega L<\frac{1}{\omega C}\) will be negative. In such case, current I leads voltage V by angle θ. The voltage across the resistance R i.e., VR and current I are in the same phase. On the other hand, the current I lags behind VL by 90° but leads VC by a 90° phase angle.

Alternating Current Phase Angle

It is clear that M VL< VC i.e., if \(\omega L<\frac{1}{\omega C}\), I leads V by an angle θ.

2. In an LCR circuit, Z plays the same role as R in a pure resistive circuit. So, Z is the impedance of the circuit.

Impedance, \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}=\sqrt{R^2+X^2}\)

where \(X=\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}=X_L-X_C\) = reactance of the circuit.

Impedance in an LCR circuit is the effective resistance of the circuit arising from the combined effect of ohmic resistance and reactance of the circuit.

shows the impedance triangle for the circuit.

Alternating Current Series LCR Circuit Impedance Triangle

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Power In Series LCR Circuit:

Here, the power factor of the circuit, \(\cos \theta=\frac{R}{Z}\)

Therefore power consumed in the circuit

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=\frac{1}{2}\left(I_0 Z\right) I_0 \cdot \frac{R}{Z}=\frac{1}{2} I_0^2 R=\left(\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\right)^2 R\)

i.e., P = I2rms R

This indicates that in this circuit power is dissipated neither in the inductor nor in the capacitor, but in the resistor only.

Hence currents through L or C are wattless.

The effective resistance of an LCR alternating current circuit is essentially the impedance of that circuit.

The inverse of impedance is known as admittance, i.e., admittance = \(\frac{1}{Z}\). Its unit is ohm” 1 or Siemens.

A pure resistance R opposes the current in any circuit and electrical energy is dissipated through it.

An inductive reactance XL and a capacitive reactance XC also oppose this current in a circuit, but no energy is dissipated through a pure inductor or a pure capacitor.

Both XL = coL and XC = depend on the frequency \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}\) a) of the applied voltage. Clearly, for a dc voltage, (o = 0 . so that XL = 0, but XC = ∞. This means that dc passes freely through a pure inductor, but is blocked by a pure capacitor, which acts like an open switch.

Units of impedance and reactance: Both quantities have the same unit ohm (Ω).

Alternating Current Notes For Class 12 WBCHSE

Important Definitions in Alternating Current

Advantages Of The Capacitor Dependent Regulator Over A Resistor Dependent Regulator: In a resistor-dependent regulator the resistance also dissipates some energy which heats the regulator.

  • On the other hand, only a capacitor but no resistor is used in an electronic regulator. Current in the circuit can be changed by regulating the capacitance of the capacitor and hence the speed of an electric fan can be controlled at will.
  • As the current flowing through a pure capacitive ac circuit is wattless, such a regulator almost does not dissipate any power.
  • So power is saved more in a capacitor-dependent regulator than in a resistor-dependent regulator. An electric regulator is useful in many devices—running an electric fan is just one of them.

Alternating Current Advantages Of The Capacitor Dependent Regulator Over A Resistor Dependent Regulator

Series resonance: It is observed from equation (4) that for \(\omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\), the denominator becomes minimum, and hence the current I will be maximum. This phenomenon is called the series resonance of the LCR circuit. If f0 is the frequency for which the circuit reaches the above state, the condition for resonance, then

\(\omega_0 L=\frac{1}{\omega_0 C} \quad\left[\omega_0=2 \pi f_0\right]\) → (6)

i.e., \(\omega_0=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)

or, \(f_0=\frac{\omega_0}{2 \pi}=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\) → (7)

This frequency f0 is called resonant frequency. The particular frequency of current In an LCR series circuit for which inductive reactance (XL) and capacitive reactance (XC) become equal to each other is called resonant frequency.

Under this condition, the circuit is termed a resonant circuit. Thus, whatever the value of frequency other than f0, current I i.e., Irms is always less than its maximum value I.

The change of ac with angular frequency in an LCR circuit is shown graphically. It is known as the resonance curve. As \(I_m=\frac{V_0}{R}, I_m\) increases with the decrease of R.

Alternating Current Series Resonance

Properties:

  1. In the case of resonance,

∴ \(\omega_0 L=\frac{1}{\omega_0 C} \text { or, } X_L=X_C\)

which indicates that the inductive and capacitive reactance balance each other. Hence the circuit becomes equivalent to a pure resistive circuit.

2. According to equation (5), for resonance,

∴ \(\tan \theta=\frac{0}{R}=0 \text { or, } \theta=0\)

i.e., in a resonance circuit, alternating voltage V and alternating current I are in equal phases. In this condition, according to equation (4) the maximum value of I0 i.e., Im = V0/R, which is equivalent to a pure resistive circuit.

3. LCR series circuit finds use in the receiver of a radio set. The resonant frequency of this LCR circuit is tuned with the frequency of the signal transmitted from a radio station.

Hence resonance occurs. As a result, the magnitude of the current increases a lot and the transmitted signal can easily be received. LCR series circuit is also known as acceptor circuit.

Sharpness Of Resonance And Q-Factor: Power consumed at LCR series circuit,

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta\)

where cosθ = power factor = \(\frac{R}{Z}\)

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cdot \frac{R}{Z}=\frac{1}{2} V_0 \cdot \frac{V_0}{Z} \cdot \frac{R}{Z}\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} V_0^2 \frac{R}{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\) → (8)

At resonance, \(\omega=\omega_0 \text { and } \omega_0 L=\frac{1}{\omega_0 C}\) and as a result power dissipation becomes maximum. From equation (8) we come to the value of maximum power dissipation, i.e.,

∴ \(P_m=\frac{V_0^2 R}{2 R^2}=\frac{V_0^2}{2 R}\) → (9)

From (8) and (9) we get,

∴ \(P=P_m \cdot \frac{R^2}{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{L}{\omega C}\right)^2}\) → (10)

Alternating Current Sharpness Of Resonance And Q-Factor

This shows the average power (P) versus frequency (ω) curve using the same circuit parameters.

The points A and B have some special importance. Each of these points denotes half maximum power \(\left(\frac{P_m}{2}\right)\).

The rapidity with which resonance phenomena arise and then disappear is a measurement of the sharpness of resonance. Resonance will be sharp if the value of bandwidth (Δω) is small.

This is of course possible only when the resonance curve falls steeply around ω = ω0.

Putting \(P=\frac{P_m}{2}\) in equation (10) we get,

= \(\frac{1}{2}=\frac{R^2}{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2} \quad \text { or, }\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)= \pm R\)

or, \(\omega^2-\frac{1}{L C}= \pm \frac{R}{L} \omega\) → (11)

But we have \(\omega_0^2=\frac{1}{L C}\) (from series resonance condition)

Therefore from equation (11),

= \(\omega^2-\omega_0^2= \pm \frac{R}{L} \omega\)

i.e., \(\omega^2-\frac{R}{L} \omega-\omega_0^2=0 \quad \text { and } \omega^2+\frac{R}{L} \omega-\omega_0^2=0\)

Solving these quadratic equations neglecting the negative values of ω we get,

∴ \(\omega_1=\frac{R}{2 L}+\left(\omega_0^2+\frac{R^2}{4 L^2}\right)^{1 / 2}\)

and \(\omega_2=-\frac{R}{2 L}+\left(\omega_0^2+\frac{R^2}{4 L^2}\right)^{1 / 2}\)

Hence, bandwidth \((\Delta \omega)=\omega_1-\omega_2=\frac{R}{L}\) → (12)

and Q-factor = \(\frac{\omega_0}{\Delta \omega}=\frac{\omega_0 L}{R}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}} \cdot \frac{L}{R}=\frac{1}{R} \sqrt{\frac{L}{C}}\) → (13)

Q-factor measures the sharpness of resonance in an LCR circuit. Inevitably, as Acy goes lesser, the Q-factor becomes greater and so resonance becomes sharper.

From equation (13), \(Q=\frac{\omega_0 L}{R}=\frac{X_L}{R}=\frac{I X_L}{I R}=\frac{V_L}{V_R}\)

where VL = voltage difference across inductor

and VR = voltage difference across the resistor

At resonance, VR = applied voltage ( V)

and VL = VC [VC = voltage difference across capacitor]

∴ \(Q=\frac{V_L}{V}=\frac{V_C}{V}\)

i.e., voltage difference (also called voltage drop) across inductor or capacitor concerning applied voltage in LCR series circuit is termed as Q-factor of the circuit.

The Q-factor is often much greater than 1. This means that in a series resonant circuit, VL and VC are much greater than the applied voltage V. This signifies a prominent voltage amplification across the inductor L and capacitor C.

Q-factor is a dimensionless parameter, which denotes the degree of damping of a resonator or oscillator. The more the value of Q, the less the rate of dissipation of energy concerning die energy stored, and the less the damping of the oscillator.

Alternating Current Power Consumed In Ac Circuits Numerical Examples

Example 1. In an LCR series ac circuit R = 10Ω, L = 50mH, and C = 5μV. Find out the resonant frequency and Q-factor. Find also the bandwidth and half-power frequencies.

Solution:

Here, L = 50mH = 5 x 10-2H;

C = 5μF = 5 X 10-6F

∴ Resonant frequency,

⇒ \(f_0=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{2 \times 3.14 \times \sqrt{\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right) \times\left(5 \times 10^{-6}\right)}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{10^4}{2 \times 3.14 \times 5}=318.5 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

and Q-factor = \(\frac{1}{R} \sqrt{\frac{L}{C}}=\frac{1}{10} \sqrt{\frac{5 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-6}}}=\frac{1}{10} \times 100=10\)

Now, \(Q=\frac{\omega_e}{\Delta \omega}=\frac{f_0}{\Delta f}\)

∴ Bandwidth, \(\Delta f=\frac{f_0}{Q}=\frac{318.5}{10}=31.85 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Half-power frequencies are,

⇒ \(f_1=f_0-\frac{\Delta f}{2}=318.5-\frac{31.85}{2}=302.6 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

and \(f_2=f_1+\frac{\Delta f}{2}=302.6+15.92=318.52 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Example 2. In an LCR series combination, R = 400Ω, L = JOOmH, and C = 1 μF. This combination is connected to a 25 sin 2000t volt source. Find

  1. The impedance,
  2. Peak value of current,
  3. The phase difference of voltage and current,
  4. Power factor and
  5. Dissipated power in the circuit.

Solution:

Applied ac voltage V = 25 sin 2000 t volt

Peak value of voltage, V0 = 25V;

angular frequency, ω = 2000 Hz

and L = 100 mH = 0.1H

So, ωL = 2000 x 0.1 =200Ω

Here, \(C=1 \mu \mathrm{F}=10^{-6} \mathrm{~F} \quad \text { So, } \frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{10^6}{2000}=500 \Omega\)

1. Impedance of the circuit,

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)

= \(\sqrt{(400)^2+(200-500)^2}=500 \Omega\)

2. Peak value of current, \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{Z}=\frac{25}{500}=0.05 \mathrm{~A}\)

3. If the phase difference between voltage and current is θ then,

∴ \(\tan \theta=\frac{\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}}{R}=\frac{200-500}{400}=-\frac{3}{4}=\tan \left(-36.9^{\circ}\right)\)

i.e., current leads voltage by a phase angle of 36.9°.

4. Power factor of the circuit,

∴ \(\cos \theta=\frac{R}{Z}=\frac{400}{500}=0.8\)

5. Power dissipated,

∴ \(P=\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cos \theta=\frac{1}{2} \times 25 \times 0.05 \times 0.8=0.5 \mathrm{~W}\)

Conceptual Questions on AC Waveforms

Example 3. The power factor of an LR circuit is \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\). If the frequency of ac is doubled, what will be the power factor?

Solution:

Power factor, \(\cos \theta=\frac{R}{Z}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

∴ Z2 = 2R2 or, R2 + (ωL)2 = 2R2 or, (ωL)2 = R2

Now if the angular frequency co is doubled,

(ω’L)2 = (2ωL)2 = 4(ωL)2 = 4R2

So, impendance, \(Z^{\prime}=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega^{\prime} L\right)^2}=\sqrt{R^2+4 R^2}=R \sqrt{5}\)

Hence, power factro, \(\frac{R}{Z^{\prime}}=\frac{R}{R \sqrt{5}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{5}}\)

Example 4. f the value of inductor L is 1 mH and the applied ac source frequency is 50 Hz, find the inductive reactance in the above case.

Solution:

Here,1 = 1 mH = 10-3 H

and ω = 2πf= 2 x 3.14 x 50 = 314 Hz

∴ XL = ωL = 314 x 10-3 = 0.314 Ω

Example 5. A series LC circuit has L = 0.405-H and C = 25 μF. The resistance R is zero. Find the frequency of resonance.

Solution:

Here, L = 0.405 H, C = 25 μF = 25 x 10-6 F

∴ \(f_r=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{2 \times 3.14 \times \sqrt{0.405 \times 25 \times 10^{-6}}}=50 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Example 6. An inductor and a capacitor of reactances 25Ω and 75Ω, respectively, are connected across a 250 V ac source in series. Find the potential difference between the inductor and the capacitor. Establish their relationship with the main voltage.

Alternating Current An Inductor And A Capacitor Of Reactances

Solution:

The impedance of the series circuit having capacitor and inductor,

Z = XC-XL = (75-25) Ω = 50Ω

So, current, \(I=\frac{250}{50}=5 \mathrm{~A}\)

∴ Potential differences across the inductor,

VL = 5 x 25V = 125V

and potential differences across the capacitor,

VC = 5 x 75 V = 375 V

Now, main voltage,

V = 250 V

Hence, the relationship between V, VL and VC is

V = VC – VL

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 7 Solutions

Example 7. A capacitor, a resistor of 5Ω, and an inductor of 50 mH are in series with an ac source marked 100 V, 50Hz. It is found that the voltage is in phase with the current. Calculate the capacitance of the capacitor and the impedance of the circuit.

Solution:

Since both the voltage and current of the circuit are in the same phase, the circuit is purely resistive. So impedance of the circuit, Z = R = 5 Ω

Frequency of the resonant circuit,

∴ \(f=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

∴ \(C=\frac{1}{4 \pi^2 L f^2}=\frac{49}{4 \times 484 \times 50 \times 10^{-3} \times 50 \times 50}\)

= 2.03 x 10-4 F

Hence, the capacitance is 2.03 x 10-4 F and the impedance is 5Ω.

Example 8. A capacitor and a resistor are connected in series with an ac source. If the potential differences across C, R are 120 V, 90 V respectively and If the rms current of the circuit; is 3 A, calculate

  1. The impedance and
  2. The power factor of the circuit.

Solution:

Alternating voltage in the circuit,

∴ \(V=\sqrt{V_R^2+V_C^2}=\sqrt{90^2+120^2}=150 \mathrm{~V}\)

Now, current through the circuit, I = 3 A

  1. Impedance of the circuit, \(Z=\frac{\dot{V}}{I}=\frac{150}{3} \Omega=50 \Omega\)
  2. Power factor of the circuit, \(\cos \theta=\frac{V_R}{V}=\frac{90}{150}=0.6\)

Example 9. A 200μF capacitor in series with a 50 Ω resistor is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz ac source.

  1. What is the maximum current in the circuit?
  2. What is the difference in time when the current and the voltage attain maximum values?

Solution:

Angular frequency of the source,

ω = 2πf=2 x 3.14 x 50Hz

C = 200μF = 2 x l0-4 F

Maximum current passing through the circuit

∴ \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\frac{1}{C^2 \omega^2}}}\)

= \(\frac{\sqrt{2} \times 220}{\sqrt{(50)^2+\frac{1}{\left(2 \times 10^{-4}\right)^2 \times 4 \times(3.14)^2 \times(50)^2}}}\)

= 5.93 A

Now, if θ is the phase angle, then

= \(\tan \theta=\frac{1}{\omega C R}=\frac{1}{2 \pi f C R}=\frac{1}{2 \times 3.14 \times 50 \times 2 \times 10^{-4} \times 50}\)

= 0. 3185

or, \(\theta=\tan ^{-1}(0.3185)=17.67^{\circ}=\frac{17.67 \times \pi}{180} \mathrm{rad}\)

If the voltage and the current attain maximum value at a time different from t, then

θ = ωt

or, \(t=\frac{\theta}{\omega}=\frac{17.67 \times \pi}{180 \times 2 \pi \times 50}=9.82 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~s}\)

Example 10. A resistor, R = 300 Ω, and a capacitor, C = 25 μF are connected in series with an ac source. The peak value of voltage ( V0) and the frequency (f) of the source is 150 V and \(\frac{50}{\pi}\) Hz respectively. Find the peak value of the current and the power dissipated in the circuit.

Solution:

If ω is the angular frequency of the ac source; then

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{2 \pi \times \frac{50}{\pi} \times 25 \times 10^{-6}}=400 \Omega\)

Thus peak value of the current,

⇒ \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\frac{1}{\omega^2 C^2}}}=\frac{150}{\sqrt{300^2+400^2}}=0.3 \mathrm{~A}\)

Hence, the power dissipated in the circuit

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} I_0^2 R=\frac{1}{2} \times(0.3)^2 \times 300=13.5 \mathrm{~W}\)

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 7 solutions

Example 11. A series LCR circuit containing a resistance of 120 Ω has an angular resonance frequency of 4 x 105 rad/s. At resonance, the voltages across resistance and inductance are 60 V and 40 V, respectively. Find the values of L and C. At what frequency, does the current in the circuit lag behind the voltage by 45°?

Solution:

At resonance, XL = XC

∴ \(I=\frac{V_R}{R}\)

= \(\frac{60}{120}\) [voltage across the resistance, VR = 60 v]

= 0.5 A

Now, voltage across the inductor,

VL = IXL = IωL

∴ or, \(L=\frac{V_L}{I \omega}=\frac{40}{0.5 \times 4 \times 10^5}\) [∵ angular frequency, w = 4 x 105 rad/s] [angular frequency, = 4 x 105 rad/s]

= 2 x 10-4 H

We know that at resonance,

⇒ \(X_L=X_C \quad \text { or, } \omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)

or, \(C=\frac{1}{\omega^2 L}=\frac{1}{\left(4 \times 10^5\right)^2 \times 0.2 \times 10^{-3}}=3.125 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~F}\)

Let the angular frequencyÿ ω1 when the current lags behind the voltage by 45°.

∴ \(\tan 45^{\circ}=\frac{\omega_1 L-\frac{1}{\omega_1 C}}{R}\)  \(C=3.125 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~F}=\frac{1}{32} \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~F}\)

or, \(1 \times 120=\omega_1 \times 2 \times 10^{-4}-\frac{1}{\omega_1\left(\frac{1}{32}\right) \times 10^{-6}}\)

or, \(\omega_1^2-6 \times 10^5 \omega_1-16 \times 10^{10}=0\)

The physically meaningful solution of the above equation is,

∴ \(\omega_1=\frac{6 \times 10^5+10 \times 10^5}{2}=8 \times 10^5 \mathrm{rad} / \mathrm{s}\)

Example 12. In an LR series circuit, a sinusoidal voltage V = V0Sin ωt is applied. It is given that L = 35 mH, R = 11Ω, Vrms = 220V, \(\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}=50 \mathrm{~Hz} \text { and } \pi=\frac{22}{7}\). Find the amplitude of the current in the steady state and obtain the phase difference between the current and the voltage. Also, plot the variation of current for one cycle on the given graph.

Alternating Current LR Series Circuit A Sinusoidal Voltage

Solution:

Inductive reactance,

∴ \(X_L=\omega L=(2 \pi)(50)\left(35 \times 10^{-3}\right) \approx 11 \Omega\)

Impedance, Z = \(\sqrt{R^2+X_L^2}=\sqrt{11^2+11^2}=11 \sqrt{2} \Omega\)

Given Vrms = 220V

Hence, amplitude of voltage, V0 = 2 Vrms = 22072 V

∴ Amplitude of current, \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{Z}=\frac{220 \sqrt{2}}{11 \sqrt{2}}=20 \mathrm{~A}\)

The phase difference between the current and the voltage in the circuit,

∴ \(\theta=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{X_L}{R}\right)=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{11}{11}\right)=\frac{\pi}{4}\)

In the LR circuit, voltage leads the current by phase angle θ. Thus current in the current circuit,

∴ \(I=I_0 \sin (\omega t-\theta)=20 \sin \left(\omega t-\frac{\pi}{4}\right)\)

Alternating Current LR Circuit Voltage Leads The Current

Class 12 WBCHSE Physics Alternating Current Concepts

Alternating Current LG Oscillations

In the circuit shown, S1S2S3 is a two-way switch. To charge the capacitor C first, one has to connect the switch S1S2. If S1S3 is connected, the charged capacitor and the inductance L constitute an LC circuit.

  • As soon as the switch is disconnected from S2, no current flows through the circuit anymore. In this condition if the amount of charge in the capacitor C is Q, the energy stored in the electric field of the capacitor is \(E_C=\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C}\), but the inductor possesses no energy, i.e., EL = 0.
  • Due to the accumulation of charge in the capacitor, it acts as a battery. Hence immediately after connecting the switch S1S3, the capacitor starts to send current in the LC circuit thus forming.
  • As this discharging current gradually rises, a magnetic field starts developing in the inductor. At this stage, it may be said that the capacitor is being discharged gradually through the inductor L.
  • After some time, the capacitor C becomes completely discharged and the current of the LC circuit reaches a peak value I0 i.e., Ec becomes zero and \(E_L=\frac{1}{2} L I_0^2\).

It means that the electrical energy in the capacitor has been transferred fully into the magnetic energy in the inductor.

Alternating Current LG Oscillations

Again, due to the flow of current in the LC circuit, the capacitor is being charged in the reverse direction i.e., the capacitor is now charged with a polarity opposite to its initial state.

  • Obviously with the increase of charge in the capacitor, the energy stored in its electric field begins to increase and the energy stored in the magnetic field of the inductance gradually decreases.
  • Hence the magnitude of the current decreases and finally comes to zero. Thus after some time, EL becomes zero again, and \(E_C=\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C}\). This process of discharging and charging of the capacitor occurs alternately.
  • We know that a capacitor can store electric energy whereas an inductor can store magnetic energy in it. Now a charged capacitor with an inductor is connected to an ac circuit, and a periodical energy transformation starts.

The energy of the capacitor is converted to the energy of the inductor and back again. This phenomenon is called LC oscillations.

In the above discussion, one half-cycle of this oscillation has been discussed. At the end of the next half-cycle, the circuit comes back to its initial condition.

  • The polarity of the plates becomes equal to its initial state and the current circuit becomes zero again. The direction of the current in the second half cycle is just opposite to that in the first half cycle.
  • So the current in an LC circuit fluctuates periodically between the peal values I0 and -I0.
  • The resistance of a pure inductor is zero so there is no energy loss due to the Joule effect. So as time elapses, no loss of total energy takes place, i.e., there is no damping of LC oscillations.
  • So the peak value of the alternating current in the LC circuit remains unchanged. But practically, the resistance of any coil cannot be ignored. Thus, there is always some resistance in the circuit due to which some energy is lost in the form of heat.
  • So the current remains oscillatory, but is damped, To maintain the alternating current, the circuit must be supplied with the same amount of energy as is being lost during each cycle, from some external source.
  • If damping is absent, the frequency of LC oscillations, \(f=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\). When this frequency becomes equal to the frequency of the applied alternating emf then resonance occurs in that circuit.

Oscillators convert direct current (dc) from a power supply to an alternating current signal. LC circuits are used in many cases as an important component of an oscillator.

Alternating Current Damping Of LC Oscillations

Class 12 Physics Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current Chapter 2 Alternating Current LG Oscillations Numerical Examples

Example 1. A 220 V, 50 Hz ac source is connected to an inductance of 0.2H and a resistance of 20 Ω in series. What is the current in the circuit?

Solution:

rms value of current, \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}}\)

Here, = 220 V,

ω = 2πf = 2 x 3.14 x 50 = 314 Hz

∴ \(\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}=\sqrt{(20)^2+(314 \times 0.2)^2}\)

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{220}{\sqrt{(20)^2+(314 \times 0.2)^2}}=3.34 \mathrm{~A}\).

Example 2. An ac source of frequency 50 Hz is connected with a resistance (R = 36Ω) and L of 0.12 H in series. What is the phase difference between current and voltage?

Solution:

If θ is the phase difference, then

∴ \(\tan \theta=\frac{\omega L}{R}\)

or, \(\theta=\tan ^{-1} \frac{\omega L}{R}=\tan ^{-1} \frac{314 \times 0.12}{36}=\tan ^{-1}(1.047)=46.3^{\circ}\)

[here ω = 2π x 50 = 2 x 3.14 x 50 = 314 Hz]

So, phase difference = 46.3°.

Example 3. A current of 1 A flows in a coil when connected to a 100 V dc source. If the same coil is connected to a 100 V, 50 Hz ac source, a current of 0.5 A flows in the coil. Calculate the inductance of the coil.

Solution:

If R is the resistance of the coil, in dc circuit \(\frac{E}{I}=R\)

or, \(R=\frac{100}{1}=100 \Omega\)

In ac circuit, \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}}\)

or, \(\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{I_{\mathrm{rms}}}=\frac{100}{0.5}=200 \Omega\)

∴ R2 + (ωL)2 = (200)2

or, \(\omega L=\sqrt{(200)^2-(100)^2}=100 \sqrt{3} \Omega\)

or, \(L=\frac{100 \sqrt{3}}{\omega}=\frac{100 \times 1.732}{2 \times 3.14 \times 50}=0.55 \mathrm{H}\)

Real-Life Scenarios in AC Circuits

Example 4. A lamp in which 10 A current can flow at 15 V is connected with an alternating source of potential 220 V and frequency 50 Hz. What should be the inductance of the choke coil required to light the bulb?

Solution:

Resistance of the lamp, \(R=\frac{15}{10}=1.5 \Omega\)

To send 10 A current through the lamp, the required impedance of the ac circuit, \(Z=\frac{220}{10}=22 \Omega\)

Now if L is the inductance of the choke coil and its resistance is negligible, then

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+(\omega L)^2} \text { or, } \omega L=\sqrt{Z^2-R^2}\)

∴ \(L=\frac{1}{\omega} \sqrt{Z^2-R^2} ;[\omega=2 \pi f=2 \times 3.14 \times 50=314 \mathrm{~Hz}]\)

= \(\frac{1}{314} \sqrt{(22)^2-(1.5)^2}=0.07 \mathrm{H}\)

Example 5. What will be the peak value of alternating current when a condenser of 1 μF is connected to an alternating voltage of 200 V, 60 Hz?

Solution:

c = 1μF = 10-6F; ω = 2πf = 2 x 3.14 x 60 Hz

Peak value of current,

\(I_0=I_{\mathrm{rms}} \times \sqrt{2}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\frac{1}{\omega C}} \cdot \sqrt{2}=E_{\mathrm{rms}} \cdot \omega C \sqrt{2}\)

= 200 x (2 x 3.14 x 60) x 10-6 x 1.414

= 0.106 A (approx.)

Class 12 WBCHSE Physics Alternating Current concepts 

Alternating Current Transformer

The electrical appliance used to increase or decrease alternating voltage is called a transformer.

The transformer, which increases the voltage is called a step-up transformer, and the transformer used to decrease the voltage is called a step-down transformer.

Transformer works on the principle of mutual induction between a pair of colls.

Description: The core of a transformer is constructed by several thin laminated sheets of soft iron placed one Over the other. It is known as a laminated core.

A core of a special shape is so chosen that no part of the magnetic flux is wasted and hence the density of lines of induction inside the core becomes maximum. Two insulated wires are wound in many turns on the middle arm of the core very close to each other.

Open coil acts as the primary (P) and the other as the secondary (S).

Alternating Current Transformer

Working Principle: An alternating voltage (Vp) is applied to the primary coil from an alternating current source.

The alternating current in coil P generates induced emf in the secondary coil S, i.e., an alternating voltage Vs is generated between the ends of S.

If the dissipation of magnetic flux and loss of energy due to heating is neglected in this transformer (called an ideal transformer), it can be proved that,

∴ \(\frac{V_s}{V_p}=\frac{N_s}{N_p}=k\)

where Np and Ns are the total numbers of turps of the primary and secondary coils, respectively, and k is called the turns ratio or transformer ratio.

  • Because of the special nature of the winding, it can be assumed fairly correctly that the magnetic flux ΦB associated with each turn of primary and secondary is the same. If e is the induced emf in each turn, \(e=-\frac{d \phi_B}{d t}\).
  • Hence the emf induced in the primary oil \(V_p=N_p e=-N_p \frac{d \phi_B}{d t}\). Similarly, \(V_s=-N_s \frac{d \phi_B}{d t}\). Now, the emf induced in the primary must necessarily be equal to the voltage applied. Then, by dividing the two \(\frac{V_s}{V_p}=\frac{N_s}{N_{\dot{p}}}=k\).

If Ns > Np, i.e., k > 1, Vs > Vp we get a step-up transformer.

If Ns < Np, i.e., k < 1, Vf < Vp we get a step-down transformer.

Uses: Transformers are widely used in our daily lives. With its help, a high voltage can be converted into a low voltage and vice versa, whenever necessary. For example,

  1. An electrical power station uses a step-up transformer to produce and transmit large amounts of ac electrical energy over long distances.
  2. The energy is transmitted at high voltage (such as 66000V- 132000 V) to reduce the loss of energy due to heating.
  3. But supply to domestic area needs low voltages (such as 110 V-440 V). Such conversions of voltage at different levels are facilitated by step-down, transformers.
  4. Radio, television, electric bell,s and other electrical appliances require small-sized transformers.

Energy Loss In Transformer: In an ideal transformer, the power dissipated in the primary coil (IpVp) = power dissipated in the secondary coil (IsVs).

But no transformer, in practice, is ideal. Generally, Some input energy is wasted in any transformer and hence VsIs < VpIp .The term VsIs / VpIp is called the efficiency of a transformer.

The main causes of energy loss and their remedies are given below.

  1. Copper Loss: Generally copper wire is used to make primary and secondary coils. Due to Joule’s heating, some energy is wasted as heat energy.
    • Remedies: Thick wire should be used to reduce this loss of energy.
  2. Iron Loss: Iron core should be used in primary and secondary cords.
    1. Due to the eddy current in this core, energy loss is unavoidable.
      • Remedies: To reduce such loss, a laminated core is used.
    2. The change of magnetization cycle in the core fails to synchronize with ac and some energy is necessarily wasted in the core—known as hysteresis loss.
      • Remedies: Due to high coercivity, the core should not be made of steel. The iron core is more effective, in reducing energy loss.
  3. Loss due to magnetic flux leakage: The flux generated by the primary coil may not be wholly linked to the secondary coil due to possible defective design of the core.
    • Remedies: Obviously, special care should be taken in the construction of the core.

Classification Of Transformer: The two most common designs of the transformer are given below:

Core-Type Transformer: In this type, primary and secondary coils are wound around the core ring. Here every limb is occupied with both primary and secondary winding placed successively around them.

Alternating Current Classification of Transformer

Shell-Type Transformer: Here the primary and secondary windings pass inside the steel magnetic circuit (core) which forms a shell around the windings, The main frame is constructed with three limbs. Both the primary and secondary windings are wound around the central limb.

Besides these, transformers can be classified based on their and these are audio frequency transformers, radio frequency transformers, etc.

Class 12 WBCHSE Physics Alternating Current concepts 

Alternating Current Transformer Numerical Example

Example 1. The number of turns in the primary aid secondary coils of an ideal transformer is 140 and 280, respectively. If the current through the primary coil is 4 A, what will be the current in the secondary coil?

Solution:

In an ideal transformer, the secondary and primary coils are equal,

i.e. VsIs ± VpIp

∴ \(I_s=I_p \cdot \frac{V_p}{V_s}=I_p \cdot \frac{N_p}{N_s}=4 \times \frac{140}{280}=2 \mathrm{~A}\)

Example 2. The initial voltage and Input power of a transformer of efficiency 80% are 100 V and 4 kW, respectively. If the voltage of the secondary coil Is 200 V, determine the currents flowing through the primary and the secondary coil.

Solution:

Power of the primary coil i.e., input power

Pp = VpIp

or, \(I_p=\frac{P_p}{V_p}=\frac{4 \times 1000}{100}=40 \mathrm{~A}\)

Power of the secondary coil, \(P_s=P_p \times \frac{80}{100}\)

Again, Ps = VsIs

So, \(I_s=\frac{P_s}{V_s}=\frac{80}{100} \times \frac{P_p}{V_s}=\frac{80}{100} \times \frac{4 \times 1000}{200}=16 \mathrm{~A}\)

Alternating Current Very Short Questions And Answers

Properties Of Alternating Voltage And Current

Question 1. If the frequency of an alternating emf is 50 Hz, how many times the direction of emf will be reversed per second?

Answer: 100

Question 2. What percentage of its peak value is the rms value of an ac?

Answer: 70.7

Question 3. What is the peak value of the voltage of a 220 V ac line?

Answer: 311 V

Question 4. If an alternating current is represented by I = sin l00 π mA, what is its peak value?

Answer: 1 mA

Question 5. If an alternating current is represented by, I = sin 100 πt mA, then what is the frequency of that current?

Answer: 50 Hz

Question 6. After what time will the direction of current in an electric supply of frequency 50 Hz be reversed?

Answer: 0.01 s

Question 7. An alternating source of emf E = E0 sinwt and negligible resistance is connected directly to an ac voltmeter. What reading will it show?

Answer: \(\left[\frac{E_0}{\sqrt{2}}\right]\)

Question 8. What changes are observed in the rms value of an ac with changes in the frequency

Answer: No change

Question 9. What is the rms value of an alternating current, I = I0 sin ωt?

Answer: \(\left[\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\right]\)

Question 10. What is the ratio between the peak value and the average value of a sinusoidal emf?

Answer: \(\left[\frac{\pi}{2}\right]\)

Question 11. The instantaneous i current in an ac circuit is I = 6 sin 314t A. What is the rms value of current?

Answer: 4.24 A

Question 12. An alternating current is I = cos 100 πt A. Find out its frequency, peak value, and rms value.

Answer: 50 Hz, 1 A, 0.707 A

Examples of Applications of Alternating Current

Question 13. Why a dc voltmeter and dc ammeter cannot read ac?

Answer: The average is zero in a cycle

Question 14. What will be the phase difference between current and emf when 220 V, 50 Hz ac source is connected to a circuit containing pure resistor?

Answer: Zero

Series AC Circuits With R, L, C

Question 15. What is the unit of impedance?

Answer: ohm

Question 16. What is the reactance of pressure resistances in an ac circuit?

Answer: Zero

Question 17. If an LCR circuit is connected to a dc source, what will be the current through the circuit?

Answer: zero

Question 18. What will be the reactance if a current of frequency f flows through an inductor of self-inductance L?

Answer: 2 π fL.

Question 19. What will be the reactance if a current of frequency f flows through a capacitor of capacitance C?

Answer: \(\left[\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}\right]\)

Question 20. If the frequency of an ac circuit is increased, how would the reactance of an inductor change?

Answer: Increase

Question 21. If the frequency of an ac circuit is increased, how would the reactance of a capacitor change?

Answer: Decrease

Question 22. In an LR circuit, the alternating current ________ the alternating emf by a phase current the alter angle.

Answer: Lags behind

Question 23. In a CR circuit, the alternating current ________ the alternating emf by a certain phase angle.

Answer: Lead

Question 24. In an alternating series LCR circuit, what is the phase difference between the voltage drops across L and C?

Answer: 180

Question 25. When does the LCR series circuit have minimum impedance?

Answer: At resonance

Question 26. What is the reactance of a capacitor of capacitance C at f Hz?

Answer: \(\left[-\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}\right]\)

Power In Ac Circuits

Question 27. What is the power factor of a circuit having pure resistance only?

Answer: Zero

Question 28. What is the power dissipated in an ac circuitin which voltage and current are given by \(V=230 \sin \left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\) and I = I0 sinωt?

Answer: Zero

LC Oscillations

Question 29. What is the natural frequency of an LC oscillator?

Answer: \(\left[\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\right]\)

Ac Generator And Transformer

Question 30. Indicate the change in emf produced by an ac dynamo in the following cases:

  1. The magnetic field is doubled,
  2. The angular velocity of the coil is decreased.

Answer: Will be doubled, will decrease

Question 31. If the area of the coil of an ac dynamo is halved, how would the emf generated change?

Answer: Halved

Question 32. If the angular velocity of the coil of an ac dynamo is doubled, how would the emfproduced change?

Answer: doubled

Question 33. By what factor would the output voltage of an ac generator change, if the number of turns in its coil is doubled?

Answer: 2

Question 34. The turns ratio of an ideal transformer is 4: 1. What will be the current in the secondary if that in the primary is 1.2A?

Answer: 4.8 A

Alternating Current Derivations For Class 12 WBCHSE

Alternating Current Synopsis Conclusion

In a dynamo, mechanical energy is converted into electrical energy.

In an electric motor, electric energy is converted into mechanical energy.

  • The current whose direction in an electrical circuit reverses periodically in a definite time interval is called alternating current.
  • The emf or potential difference whose direction reverses periodically in a definite time interval is called alternating emf or alternating potential difference.
  • The electrical machine used to increase or decrease an alternating voltage is called a transformer. The transformer which increases the voltage is called a step-up transformer and which decreases the voltage is called a step-down transformer.
  • The amount of power dissipation in any part of an AC circuit depends not only on ac voltage and current but also on their phase difference.
  • The inductor or capacitor in an ac circuit resists the current just like a resistor. This resistance is called reactance. The pure resistance, inductive reactance, and capacitive reactance do not remain in the same phase.

The effective resistance against current in an ac circuit due to a combination of pure resistance, inductive reactance, and capacitive reactance is known as the impedance of the circuit. The magnitude of this impedance depends on the ac voltage and current.

  • With the change of ac voltage frequency current also changes simultaneously.
  • The frequency for which current becomes maximum is known as resonant frequency.
  • In an LC circuit periodic interchange occurs between the stored energy in the electric field of the capacitor and that in the magnetic field of the inductor. This is LC oscillation.
  • The power factor ofpure resistor is 1 i.e., it is the resistance that dissipates maximum power.
  • The power factor of a pure inductor or capacitor is zero, i.e., they do not dissipate any power. Current through them is called wattless.

The emf induced in a coil rotating with uniform angular velocity ω in a uniform magnetic field intensity B, about an axis perpendicular to the field is,

e = NABω sin(ωt+ α) = e0sin (ωt+α)

[The coil is of cross-sectional area A having N turns]

If the total resistance of the coil and the external circuit is R, the induced current

∴ \(i=\frac{e}{R}=\frac{\omega B A N}{R} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)=\frac{e_0}{R} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\)

= i0sin(ωt+ α)

Equation of an alternating emf,

V = V0sin(ωt+ α) where V0 = ωABN

Equation of an alternating current,

∴ \(I=\frac{V}{R}=\frac{V_0}{R} \sin (\omega t+\alpha)=I_0 \sin (\omega t+\alpha)\)

The average values of alternating voltage and current are respectively,

∴ \(\bar{V}=\frac{2 V_0}{\pi} \text { and } \bar{I}=\frac{2 I_0}{\pi}\)

rms values of the alternating voltage and current are respectively,

∴ \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}} \text { and } I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Form factor for a sinusoidal wave, \(f=\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\bar{V}}=\frac{\pi}{2 \sqrt{2}}=1.11\)

If the number of turns in the primary coil of a transformer = Np, the number of turns in its secondary coil = Ns, and the ratio of the number of turns = k, then in the case of an ideal transformer,

∴ \(\frac{I_p}{I_s}=\frac{V_s}{V_p}=\frac{N_s}{N_p}=k\)

In an ideal transformer, input power (VpIp) = Output power ( VsIs ).

The efficiency of a transformer = \(\frac{V_s I_s}{V_p I_p}\); the efficiency of an ideal transformer = 1 or 100%.

Inductive reactance, XL = ωL.

Capacitive reactance, \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)

The impedance of an LCR series circuit,

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)

In an LCR series circuit, if ac voltage V = V0 sin ωt then alternating current, I = I0 sin(ωt- θ),

Where \(\dot{I}_0=\frac{V_0}{Z} \text { and } \tan \theta=\frac{\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}}{R}\)

Condition for resonance in an LCR series circuit,

∴ \(\omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)

Resonant frequency, \(f_0=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

Effective voltage magnification for series resonance,

∴ \(Q=\frac{V_L}{V_R}=\frac{V_C}{V_R}=\frac{\omega_0 L}{R}=\frac{1}{\omega_0 C R}=\frac{1}{R} \sqrt{\frac{L}{C}}\)

The natural frequency of an LC oscillator,

∴ \(f=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

Power dissipation in an ac circuit

= \(V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \theta\)

where cos θ = power factor.

Alternating Current Assertion Reason Type Question And Answers

Direction: These questions have Statement 1 and Statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation, for Statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, and statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for Statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false Statement 2 is true.

Question 1. Statement 1: The peak values by alternating voltage and alternating current in a circuit are V0 andd0 respectively.

The phase difference between voltage and current is θ. Then the power consumed is V0 I0 cosθ.

Statement 2: The consumed power in an alternating circuit depends on the phase difference between the emf and current.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false Statement 2 is true.

Question 2. Statement I: Q-factor of a series LCR circuit is \(\frac{1}{R} \sqrt{\frac{L}{C}}\).

Statement 2: The resonant frequency of an LCR circuit does not depend on the resistance of the circuit.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for Statement 1.

Question 3. Statement 1: If the total energy in an LC oscillator is equally distributed between the magnetic and electric fields then the charge stored in the capacitor is \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) fraction of the maximum charge stored in the capacitor during oscillation.

Statement 2: The charge stored in the capacitor becomes maximum at a time when the total energy of the LC circuit is stored in the electric field.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation, for Statement 1.

Question 4. Statement 1: Form factor becomes different for different waveforms of alternating voltage and current

Statement 2: The mean value of alternating voltage or current = \(\frac{2}{\pi}\) x peak value and rms value = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) x peak value for any waveform.

Answer: 3. Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is false.

Question 5. Statement 1: A series LCR circuit when connected to an ac source gives the terminal potential difference 50 V across each of resistor R, inductor L and capacitor C. Then the terminal potential difference across LC is zero.

Statement 2: The terminal alternating voltages across the inductor and capacitor in a series LCR Circuit in an opposite phase.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation, for Statement 1.

Question 6. Statement 1: If the value of the output voltage of an ideal transformer is half the value of the input voltage, then the output current will become twice.

Statement 2: No energy is dissipated in an ideal transformer

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation, for Statement 1.

Question 7. Statement 1: The alternating current lags behind the voltage by a phase angle \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) when ac flows through an inductor.

Statement 2: The inductive reactance increases as the frequency of ac source decreases.

Answer: 3. Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is false.

Question 8. Statement 1: An inductor acts as a perfect conductor for dc.

Statement 2: dc remains constant in magnitude and direction.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for Statement 1.

Alternating Current Match the following

Question 1. Match the columns for a series LCR circuit.

Alternating Current A Series LCR Circuit

Answer: 1-C, 2-A, 3-D, 4-B

Question 2. An LCR circuit (R = 40 Ω, L = 100mH, C = 0.242 μF) is connected with an ac voltage source of peak voltage 200 V and frequency 1000 Hz.

Alternating Current LCR Circuit Is Connected With An Ac Voltage Source Of Peak Voltage And Frequency

Answer: 1-D, 2-C, 3-A, 4-B

Question 3. Column I describes some action and column 2 the required device.

Alternating Current Some Actions And The Required Device

Answer: 1-D, 2-C, 3-A, 4-B

Question 4. In an LR circuit instantaneous voltage and instantaneous current are V = 100 sin100t and i = I0 sin(100t – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) respectively.

Alternating Current LCR Circuit Instantaneous Voltage And Instantaneous Current

Answer: 1-B, 2-C, 3-A, 4-D

Question 5. Referring to the given circuit, match the following.

image

Alternating Current Referring The Given Circuit

Answer: 1-A and D, 2-B, 3-A and D, 4-C

Alternating Current derivations for Class 12 WBCHSE

Alternating Current Comprehension Type Questions And Answers

Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions at the end of It.

Question 1. A series combination of an inductor of self-inductance L, capacitor of capacitance C, and resistor of resistance R is connected to an alternating voltage source of V=V0 sin ωt. The current through the circuit is I = I0 sin(t-0), where \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}}\) and \(\theta=\tan ^{-1} \frac{1}{R}\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)\).

Note that, the frequency of both voltage and, current is \(f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\). The rms value of these parameters during one complete cycle are \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}} \text { and } I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\) respectively. These values are shown in alternating voltmeter and ammeter.

The power consumed by the circuit P = VI. The mean value i.e., the effective power of the circuit in a complete cycle is \(\bar{P}=V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \theta\). This cos θ is termed the power factor.

1. V = V0 sin ωt electromotive force is applied to an alternating circuit consisting of resistance R’ and an inductor of self-inductance L. The phase difference between the voltage and current is

  1. 90°
  2. \(\tan ^{-1} \frac{\omega L}{R^{\prime}}\)
  3. \(\tan ^{-1} \frac{R^{\prime}}{\sqrt{\left(R^{\prime}\right)^2+\omega^2 L^2}}\)
  4. \(\tan ^{-1} \frac{\sqrt{R^{\prime 2}+\dot{\omega}^2 L^2}}{R^{\prime}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\tan ^{-1} \frac{\omega L}{R^{\prime}}\)

2. The power factor of the circuit in question (1) is

  1. Zero
  2. \(\frac{\omega L}{R^{\prime}}\)
  3. \(\frac{R^{\prime}}{\sqrt{R^{\prime 2}+\omega^2 L^2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{\sqrt{R^{\prime 2}+\omega^2 L^2}}{R^{\prime}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{R^{\prime}}{\sqrt{R^{\prime 2}+\omega^2 L^2}}\)

3. In the circuit in question (1) the inductor is replaced by a pure capacitor; the phase difference between the current and terminal voltage of the capacitor is

  1. -90°
  2. zero
  3. Between -90° and zero
  4. +90°

Answer: 1. -90°

4. The power factor of the circuit in question (3) is

  1. -1
  2. Zero
  3. Between zero and 1
  4. 1

Answer: 3. Between zero and 1

5. The voltage applied in an LCR circuit having R = 10Ω, L = 10 mH and C = 1 μF is V = 20 sin ωt volt. For what frequency of the applied voltage will the current reach Its peak value?

  1. 159 Hz
  2. 1592 Hz
  3. 1.59 x 104 Hz
  4. 1.59 x 105 Hz

Answer: 2. 1592 Hz

6. The phase difference between the voltage and peak current in question (v) is

  1. Zero
  2. -90°
  3. +90°
  4. 180°

Answer: 1. Zero

7. Which element is responsible for the power consumption in an alternating current circuit?

  1. Only resistor
  2. Only Inductor
  3. Only capacitor
  4. Resistor, inductor, and capacitor

Answer: 2. Only Inductor

8. The frequency of the applied alternating voltage In an. ac circuit is 50 Hz. The resistance and self-inductance of the circuit are 37.6 fL and 120 mH. The phase difference between the voltage and current is

  1. Zero
  2. 45°
  3. 60°
  4. 90°

Answer: 2. 45°

Question 2. A transformer is a device used to increase or decrease the voltage in the transmission line according to requirements. Generally, the input line voltage is fed into a primary coil and the output line voltage is obtained from the terminals of another coil. In an ideal transformer, the primary and secondary coils are linked in such a way that there is no loss of magnetic flux and electrical energy.

In an ideal transformer, if the number of turns and input voltage across the terminals of the primary coil are N1 and V1, then the output voltage at the two terminals of the secondary coil \(V_2=V_1 \cdot \frac{N_2}{N_1}\), where N2 is. the number of turns in the secondary coil.

1. The ratio of the number of turns of the primary and secondary coils of an ideal transformer is 2: 1. If the input voltage is 440 V, then the output voltage is

  1. 220 V
  2. 440 V
  3. 88 W
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 220 V

2. In question (1) if the input power of the transformer is 44 W, then the output power is

  1. 22 W
  2. 44 W
  3. 88 W
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 44 W

3. In the above-mentioned transformer the input and output currents are respectively,

  1. 100 mA, 100 mA
  2. 200 mA, 200 mA
  3. 100 mA, 200 mA
  4. 200 mA, 100 mA

Answer: 3. 100 mA, 100 mA

Alternating Current Integer Answer Type Questions And Answers

In this type, the answer to each of the questions is a single-digit integer ranging from 0 to 9.

Question 1. A resistance and a capacitor are connected in series with an alternating voltage of rms value 13 V. The terminal voltage of the resistor is 12 V and that across the capacitor is (n + 0.38) V. What is the value of n?

Answer: 6

Question 2. The current and voltage in an ac circuit are \(I=\sin \left(100 t+\frac{\pi}{3}\right) \mathrm{A}\) and V = 20 sin 100 tV. Calculate the power of the circuit in W.

Answer: 5

Question 3. In a series LCR circuit, the capacitance C is replaced by 2C. To keep the resonance frequency unchanged, the inductance has to be replaced by an inductance of L’. Find the ratio of L and L’.

Answer: 2

Question 4. An alternating voltage of 5 V of frequency 50 Hz is connected to a series LCR circuit. The potential difference across the inductor and resistor is 6 V and 4 V respectively. What is the voltage across the capacitor (in V)?

Answer: 3

Question 5. In a series LCR circuit R = 1 kΩ, C = 2μF, and the potential difference across R is 2 V. At resonance ω = 200 rad.s-1. What is the potential difference (in V) across L at resonance? across

Answer: 5

Question 6. In a series LCR circuit R = 25Ω, L = 10 mH, and C = 1μF. The circuit is connected to an AC source of variable frequency. What is the Q-factor of the circuit?

Answer: 4

Question 7. A current of 50 mA flows through a 4 μF capacitor connected to a 500 Hz ac source. The terminal potential difference (in V) across the capacitor is (η + 0.98). What is the value of η? (π = 3.14)

Answer: 3

Question 8. In the figure, an LCR series circuit is shown. What would be the ammeter reading ampere?

Alternating Current Ammeter Reading In Ampere

Answer: 8

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics  Alternating Current Short Answer Questions

Class 12 Physics Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Question 1. The 60pF capacitor is connected to a 110 V, 60 Hz ac supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the circuit. What is the net power absorbed by the circuit over a complete cycle?

Answer:

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{X_C}\)

Where, \(X_c=\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}=\frac{1}{2 \pi \times 60 \times 60 \times 10^{-6}} \Omega\)

and Vrms = 110V

Irms = 110(2π x 60 x 60 x 10-6)A = 2.49 A

The net power absorbed is zero as in the case of an ideal capacitor there is no power loss.

Question 2. Determine the resonant frequency ωr of a series LCR circuit with L = 2.0 H, C = 32 μF, and R = 10 Ω. What is the Q-value of this circuit?

Answer:

= \(\omega_r=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2 \times 32 \times 10^{-6}}}=125 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

∴ \(Q=\frac{X_L}{R}=\frac{\omega_r L}{R}=\frac{125 \times 2}{10}=25\)

Read And Learn More WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

Question 3. A charged 30 μF capacitor is connected to a 27 mH inductor.

  1. What is the angular frequency of free oscillations of the circuit?
  2. If the initial charge on the capacitor is 6 mC then what is the total energy stored in the circuit initially? What is the total energy at a later time?

Answer:

  1. \(\omega_r=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{27 \times 10^{-3} \times 32 \times 10^{-6}}}=1.1 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)
  2. \(E=\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{\left(6 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2}{30 \times 10^{-6}}=0.6 \mathrm{~J}\)

There will be no change in total energy.

Question 4. A series LCR circuit with R = 20 Ω, L = 1.5 H, and C = 35 μF F is connected to a variable frequency 200 V ac supply. When the frequency of the supply equals the natural frequency of the circuit, what is the average power transferred to the circuit in one complete cycle?

Answer:

When natural frequency and supply frequency are equal, resonance occurs.

∴XL = XC    ∴Z = R

P = \(\frac{V^2}{Z}=\frac{V^2}{R}=\frac{200 \times 200}{20}=2000 \mathrm{~W}\)

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Short Answer Questions

WBBSE Class 12 Alternating Current Short Answer Questions

Question 5. A radio can tune over the frequency range of a portion of the MW broadcast band: 800 kHz to 1200 kHz. If its LC circuit has an effective inductance of 200μH, what must be the range of the variable capacitor?

[Hint: for tuning, the natural frequency of the LC circuit should be equal to the frequency of the radio wave.]

Answer:

∴ \(f=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}} \quad \text { or, } C=\frac{1}{4 \pi^2 f^2 L}\)

when L = 200 μH and f = 800 kHz,

∴ \(C_1=\frac{1}{4 \pi^2 \times 800 \times 800 \times 10^6 \times 200 \times 10^{-6}}\)

= 87.9 pF

when f = 1200 kHz,

∴ \(C_2=\frac{1}{4 \pi^2 \times 1200 \times 1200 \times 10^6 \times 200 \times 10^{-6}}\)

= 87.9 pF

The range of the capacitance should be between 87.9 pF and 197.8 pF, i.e., between 88 pF and 198 pF.

Question 6. A series LCR circuit is connected to a variable frequency 230 V source. L = 5.0 H, C = 80μF, R = 40Ω.

  1. Determine the source frequency for which resonance occurs in the circuit.
  2. Obtain the impedance of the circuit and amplitude of current at resonance.
  3. Determine the rms potential drop across L and C.
  4. Show that at resonance the potential drop across LC combination is zero.

Answer:

1. \(\omega_r=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{5 \times 180 \times 10^{-6}}}=50 \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

2. At resonance impedance, Z = R = 40 H

∴ \(I_{\max }=\frac{V_{\max }}{R}=\frac{\sqrt{2} \times 230}{40}=8.1 \mathrm{~A}\)

3. Across L, VL = I x XL = IωL

∴ VL = 8.1 x 50 x 5 = 2025 V

Across \(C, V_C=\frac{I}{\omega C}=\frac{8.1}{50 \times 80 \times 10^{-6}}=2025 \mathrm{~V}\)

The potential drop across LC combination = VL – VC = 0.

Question 7. An LC circuit has L = 20 mH, C = 50μF and initial. charge 10 mC the resistance being negligible.

  1. What is the total energy stored initially? Is it conserved during the LC oscillator?
  2. What is the natural frequency of the circuit?
  3. After what time interval from the moment the circuit is switched on the energy stored is
    1. Completely electrical i.e., stored only in the capacitor and
    2. Completely magnetic, i.e., stored only in the inductor?
  4. At what time is the total energy shared equally between the inductor and the capacitor?
  5. If a resistor is inserted in the circuit, how much energy is dissipated as heat?

Answer:

1. Total Initial energy = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{10^{-4}}{50 \times 10^{-6}}=1 \mathrm{~J}\)

If R = 0, then total energy is conserved.

2. \(\omega=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)

∴ Resonance frequency,

⇒ \(\omega=\frac{1}{\sqrt{20 \times 10^{-3} \times 50 \times 10^{-6}}}=10^3 \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

⇒ \(f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}=\frac{10^3}{2 \times 3.14}=159 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

3. q = q0 cos ωt

1. When \(t=0, \frac{T}{2}, T, \frac{3 T}{2}, \ldots \ldots\)

then q = ±q0 i.e., the energy is completely electrical.

2. When \(t=\frac{T}{4}, \frac{3 T}{4}, \frac{5 T}{4}, \ldots \ldots\)

then q = 0 i.e., the energy is purely magnetic.

4. \(E=\frac{q^2}{2 C}=\frac{1}{2 C} q_0^2 \cos ^2 \omega t\)

when ωt = 45°, \(\cos \omega t=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

∴ \(E=\frac{1}{2 C} \cdot q_0^2 \cdot \frac{1}{2}=\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{q_0^2}{2 C}\right)=\frac{1}{2}\) x total energy

so, when \(\omega t=45^{\circ} \text { or } t=\frac{T}{8}, \frac{3 T}{8}, \frac{5 T}{8}, \cdots\) the energy is shared equally between the capacitor and inductor.

5. When a resistor is connected in the circuit, all the energy stored in the circuit (i.e., 1 J ) will be dissipated as heat energy since the LC oscillation will be damped and stop ultimately.

Real-Life Applications of AC and DC Currents

Question 8. A coil of inductance 0.50 H and resistance 100 Ω is connected to a 240 V, 50 Hz AC supply.

  1. What is the maximum current in the coil?
  2. What is the time lag between the voltage maximum and current maximum?
  3. If the circuit is connected to a high-frequency supply (240 V, 10 kHz ), what will be the answer to (1) and (2). From the answer explain the statement that at a very high frequency the presence of a inductor in the circuit nearly amounts to an open circuit.
  4. How does an inductor behave in a dc circuit after the steady state?

Answer:

1. \(I_{\max }=\frac{V_{\max }}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}=\frac{\sqrt{2} \times 240}{\sqrt{100^2+(2 \pi \times 50 \times 0.5)^2}}\)

= 1.82A

2. \(\tan \phi=\frac{X_L}{R}=\frac{2 \pi f L}{R}=\frac{2 \pi \times 50 \times 0.5}{100}=1.571\)

∴ Φ = tan-11.571 = 57.5°

∴ Time interval = \(\frac{T}{360} \times \phi=\frac{\phi}{360 f}\)

= \(\frac{57.5}{360 \times 50}=3.19 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~s}\)

3. ω = 2πf = 2π x 104 rad s-1.

∴ \(I_{\max }=\frac{V_{\max }}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}=\frac{240 \sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{100^2+4 \pi^2 \cdot 10^8 \cdot 5^2}}=0.011 \mathrm{~A}\)

∴ \(\phi=\tan ^{-1}\left\{\frac{X_L}{R}\right\}=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{2 \pi f L}{R}\right)\)

= \(\tan ^{-1} \frac{2 \pi \times 10^4 \times 0.5}{100}\)

= \(\tan ^{-1}(100 \pi) \approx \frac{\pi}{2}\)

∴ Time interval = \(\phi \cdot \frac{T}{360}=\frac{\phi}{360 f}\)

= \(\frac{90}{360 \times 10 \times 10^3}=0.25 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~s}\)

Imax is very small. So it can be concluded that at high frequencies an inductance behaves as an open circuit.

4. In a steady dc circuit, f = 0.

The inductance acts as a simple conductor.

Question 9. A circuit containing an 80 mH inductor and a 60μF capacitor in series is connected to a 230 V, 50 Hz supply. The resistance of the circuit is negligible.

  1. Obtain the current amplitude and rms values.
  2. Obtain rms values of potential drops across the inductor and capacitor.
  3. What is the average power transferred to the inductor?
  4. What is the average power transferred to the capacitor?
  5. What is the total average power absorbed by the circuit?

Answer:

1. \(I_{\max }=\frac{V_{\max }}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(X_L-X_C\right)^2}}\)

∴ XL = ωL = 100π x 80 x 10-3 = 25.12 Ω

∴ \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{100 \pi \times 60 \times 10^{-6}}=53.03 \Omega\)

∴ \(I_{\max }=\frac{230 \sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{(25.12-53.03)^2}}=11.6 \mathrm{~A}\)

= \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_{\max }}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{11.6}{\sqrt{2}}=8.20 \mathrm{~A}\)

2. \(V_L=I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cdot \omega L=8.20 \times 25.12 \approx 206 \mathrm{~V}\)

∴ \(V_C=I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cdot \frac{1}{\omega C}=8.20 \times 53.03 \approx 435 \mathrm{~V}\)

3. Average power transferred to the inductor,

∴ \(P_L=V I \cos \phi=V I \cos \frac{\pi}{2}=0\)

4. Average power transferred to the capacitor,

∴ \(P_C=V I \cos \phi=V I \cos \frac{\pi}{2}=0\)

5. Average power absorbed by the circuit = 0

Question 10. A series LCR circuit with L = 0.12H, C = 480nF, and R = 23 Ω is connected to a 230 V variable frequency supply.

  1. What is the source frequency for which the current amplitude is maximum? Obtain this maximum value.
  2. What is the source frequency for which the average power absorbed by the circuit is maximum? Obtain the value of this maximum power.
  3. What is the Q-factor of the circuit?

Answer:

1. The current amplitude and average absorbed power both are maximum at the resonant frequency.

∴ \(f_0=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}=\frac{1}{2 \times 3.14 \sqrt{0.12 \times 480 \times 10^{-9}}}\)

= 663 Hz

The current amplitude is maximum when the source frequency is 663 Hz.

∴ \(I_{\max }=\frac{V_{\max }}{R}=\frac{230 \sqrt{2}}{23}=14.14 \mathrm{~A}\)

2. The average absorbed power is maximum when the source frequency is 663 Hz.

∴ \(P_{\mathrm{av}}=\frac{1}{2} I_{\max }^2 R=\frac{1}{2} \times(14.14)^2 \times 23=2300 \mathrm{~W}\)

3. \(Q=\frac{X_L}{R}=\frac{2 \pi f_0 \cdot L}{R}=\frac{2 \pi \times 663 \times 0.12}{23}=21.7\)

Common Questions on AC Power and Reactance

Question 11.

  1. In any ac circuit, is the applied instantaneous voltage equal to the algebraic sum of the instantaneous voltages across the series elements of the circuit?
  2. Is the same true for rms voltage?

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. No, it is not true for rms voltage because the potential differences across various parts of the circuit may not be in the same phase.

Question 12. Why a capacitor is used in the primary circuit of an induction coil?

Answer:

Whenever there is a break in the current, a large emf is induced in the circuit which is utilized in charging the capacitor. This prevents any spark in the circuit.

Question 13. When a choke is connected In series with a lamp in the DC line, the lamp shines brightly. The insertion of an Iron core in the choke does not affect the brightness. What happens In the case of ac line?

Answer:

An inductance acts as a simple conductor in a dc line, and reducing its self-inductance by introducing an iron core, does not affect the brightness of the lamp. In ac line the presence of inductance results in a drop of voltage. So the brightness of the lamp decreases. The introduction of the iron core further reduces the brightness of the lamp.

Question 14. Why a choke is needed with a fluorescent lamp with ac mains? Why a normal resistor cannot be used in place of the choke?

Answer:

An inductor can introduce a voltage drop in a circuit without any loss of power but a resistor gets heated during the process and some power is lost. A choke acts as an inductor in a circuit, so a choke is used in place of a resistor.

Question 15. A small town with a demand of 800 kW of power at 220 V is situated 15 km away from an electric plant generating power at 440 V. The resistance of the two-wire line carrying power is 0.5H.km-1. The line gets power from the line through a 4000-220 V step-down transformer at a substation in the town.

  1. Estimate the line power loss in the form of heat.
  2. How much power must the plant supply, assuming there is negligible power loss due to leakage?
  3. Characterize the step-up transformer at the plant.

Answer:

1. Total resistance of the line = 0.5 x 15 x 2 = 15 Ω rms current through the line,

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{\text { power }}{\text { voltage }}=\frac{800 \times 1000}{4000}=200 \mathrm{~A}\)

∴ Power loss due to the generation of heat

= I2rms.R = (200)2 x 15 = 600 kW

2. Power supplied by the plant = 800 + 600 = 1400 kW

3. Voltage dropin the line

= Irms .R = 200 x 15 = 3000 V

∴ The plant transformer should supply (4000 + 3000) = 7000 V

∴ A 440 V/7000V step-up transformer should be used.

Question 16. An ac having a peak value of 1.41 ampere is used to heat a wire. A dc producing the same heating rate will be approximately.

  1. 1.41 A
  2. 2.0 A
  3. 0.705 A
  4. 1.0 A

Answer: 4. 1.0 A

The rms value of the alternating current,

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{1.41}{1.41}=1 \mathrm{~A}\)

Hence, the dc required to produce the same heating rate =1 A.

The option 4 is correct.

Question 17. An ac voltage e = E0 sin cot is applied across an ideal inductor of self-inductance [L]. Write down the peak current.

Answer:

Peak value of the current = \(\frac{E_0}{\omega L}\)[Inductive reactarpe = ωL]

Question 18. The instantaneous voltage from an ac source is given by e = 200 sin 314t volt. Find the rms voltage. What is the frequency of the source?

Answer:

Peak voltage = 200 V

Then, rms voltage = \(\frac{200}{\sqrt{2}}=141.4 \mathrm{~V}\)

Angular frequency, \(\omega=314 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

The frequency of the source = \(\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}=\frac{314}{2 \times 3.14}=50 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Question 19. State the condition trader in which the phenomenon of resonance occurs in a series LCR circuit when ac voltage is applied. In a series LCR circuit, the current is in the same phase as the voltage. Calculate the value of self-inductance if the capacitor is 20 μF and the resistance used is 10 ohm with the ac source of frequency 50 Hz.

Answer:

Condition of resonance in a series LCR circuit:

∴ \(\omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)

where a) = angular frequency of the source, L = self-inductance of the coil, and C = capacitance.

According to the question, electric current and emf are in the same phase in the LCR circuit, i.e., the circuit is in the resonance condition.

Here, ω = 2π x 50 = 2 x 3.14 x 50 = 314 Hz

C = 20 μF = 20 x 10-6 F = 2 x 10-5 F

Now, \(\omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)

or, \(L=\frac{1}{\omega^2 C}=\frac{1}{(314)^2 \times\left(2 \times 10^{-5}\right)}=0.507 \mathrm{H}\)

Examples of Calculating RMS Values in AC Circuits

Question 20. Whatis Q-factor?

Answer:

Q-factor is a dimensionless parameter that describes how underdamped an oscillator or a resonator is.

Question 21.

  1. Compare between inductive reactance and capacitive reactance.
  2. In an LCR series combination, R = 400Ω, L = 100 mH and C= 1μF. This combination is connected to a 25 sin 2000t volt voltage source. Find the impedance of the circuit and the peak value of the circuit current.

Answer:

1. Inductive reactance, XL = coL increases with the increase of either frequency or inductance or both. Capacitive reactance, \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}\) decreases with the increase of either frequency or capacitance or both.

2. 1st Part: Frequency of the source, ω = 200 rad/s

∴ Impedance,

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)

= \(\sqrt{400^2+\left(2000 \times 100 \times 10^{-3}-\frac{1}{200 \times 10^{-6}}\right)^2}\)

= \(\sqrt{16 \times 10^4+9 \times 10^4}=500 \Omega\)

2nd Part: Peak value of current,

∴ \(I_0=\frac{V_0}{R}=\frac{25}{400}=62.5 \mathrm{~mA}\)

Question 22.

  1. Why is the use of ac voltage preferred over dc voltage?
  2. The power factor of the LR circuit is \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\). If the frequency of ac is doubled, what will be the power factor?

Answer:

1. Ac voltage can be stepped up or stepped down using a transformer, which is essential for power transmission. and power consumption in daily life. In addition, any capacitor or inductor can be used as an active component in an ac circuit,.These advantages are not provided by dc voltages.

2. If the phase difference between the voltage and the current in the LR circuit is θ,

∴ \(\tan \theta=\frac{\omega L}{R}\)

From the figure, power factor,

∴ \(\cos \theta=\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}\)

In the first case,

∴ \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}} \quad \text { or, } \frac{R^2}{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}=\frac{1}{3}\)

or, ω2L2 = 3R2 – R2 = 2R2

In the second case, the frequency Is doubled. The new frequency Is 2ω.

∴ Power factor = \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+4 \omega^2 L^2}}=\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+4 \times 2 R^2}}\)

= \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{9 R^2}}=\frac{1}{3}\)

Alternating Current Phase Difference

Question 23. If the rotating speed of a dynamo is doubled, the induced electromotive force will be

  1. Doubled
  2. Halved
  3. Four times as much
  4. Unchanged

Answer: 1. Doubled

e = ωBANsin(ωt + α); if w is doubled then e is also doubled.

The option 1 is correct.

Question 24. The number of turns of the primary and secondary of a transformer are 500 and 5000 respectively. The primary is connected to a 20 V, 50 Hz ac supply. The output of the secondary will be

  1. 2 V, 50 Hz
  2. 200 V, 50 Hz
  3. 200 V, 5 Hz
  4. 200 V, 500 Hz

Answer: 2. 200 V, 50 Hz

Output voltage = \(20 \times \frac{5000}{500}=200 \mathrm{~V}\); the frequency will not change.

The option 2 is correct.

Question 25. What is the rms value of the current i = 5√2 sin 100 t A?

Answer:

rms value = \(\frac{\text { peak value }}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{5 \sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{2}}=5 \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 26. In the circuit shown below, the switch Is kept In position a for n long time and is then thrown to position b. The amplitude of the resulting oscillating current Is given by

Alternating Current Resulting Oscillating Current

  1. \(B \sqrt{L / C}\)
  2. E/R
  3. Infinity
  4. \(E \sqrt{C / L}\)

Answer: 4. \(E \sqrt{C / L}\)

If the switch Is kept In position for a long time, the charge accumulated on the capacitor plates = EC.

When the switch Is thrown to position b, It behaves as a source of emf due to the accumulated charges.

Electromotive force = \(\frac{E C}{C}=E\)

As a result, the LC circuit changes to an oscillating circuit, whose angular frequency, \(\omega=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)

∴ Maximum current through the circuit

= \(\frac{E}{\omega L}=\frac{E}{\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}} \cdot L}=E \cdot \sqrt{\frac{C}{L}}\)

or, \(\frac{E}{1 / \omega C}=E \omega C=E \frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}} C=E \sqrt{\frac{C}{L}}\)

The option 4 is correct.

Question 27. When the frequency of the ac voltage applied to a series LCR circuit is gradually increased from a low value, the impedance of the circuit

  1. Monotonically increases
  2. First increases and then decreases
  3. First decreases and then increases
  4. Monotonically decreases

Answer: 3. First decreases and then increases

We know Z = \(\sqrt{\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2+R^2}\)

If \(\frac{d Z}{d \omega}=0 \text { then, } \omega=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)

When \(\omega<\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\) i.e., Z is a decreasing function. Again, when \(\omega>\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}} \text { then } \frac{d Z}{d \omega}>0\) i.e., Z is a increasing function.

The option 3 is correct.

Question 28. An alternating current is flowing through a series LCR circuit. It is found that the current reaches a value of 1 mA at both 200 Hz and 800 Hz frequencies. What is the resonance frequency of the circuit?

  1. 600 Hz
  2. 300 Hz
  3. 500 Hz
  4. 400 Hz

Answer: 4. 400 Hz

For LCR circuit, \(I=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}}\)

Since currents for frequencies 200 Hz and 800 Hz are the same,

∴ \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega_1 L-\frac{1}{\omega_1 C}\right)^2}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega_2 L-\frac{1}{\omega_2 C}\right)^2}}\)

or, \(\left(\omega_1 L-\frac{1}{\omega_1 C}\right)= \pm\left(\omega_2 L-\frac{1}{\omega_2 C}\right)\) (1)

By interchanging the value of ω1 and ω2, the sign of the value of \(\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)\) may change. So, by considering’+’ sign in the left-hand side and the sign on the right-hand side of equation (1), we have

∴ \(\left(\omega_1 L-\frac{1}{\omega_1 C}\right)=-\left(\omega_2 L-\frac{1}{\omega_2 C}\right)\)

or, \(L C=\frac{1}{\omega_1 \omega_2} \quad \text { or, } \omega_1 \omega_2=\frac{1}{L C} \quad \text { or, } \omega_1 \omega_2=\omega_0^2\)

or, f1f2 = f20 [f0 – resonance frequency]

or, f0 = 400 Hz

The option 4 is correct

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 29. An inductor (L = 0.03 H) and a resistor (R = 0.15kΩ) are connected in series to a battery of 15 V in a circuit shown below. The key K1 has been kept closed for a long time. Then at t = 0, K1 is opened and key K2 is closed simultaneously. At t = 1 ms, the current in the circuit will be (e5 ≈ 150)

Alternating Current An Inductor And A Resistor Connected In Series To A Battery

  1. 100 mA
  2. 67 mA
  3. 6.7 mA
  4. 0.67 mA

Answer: 4. 0.67 mA

When the key K1 is closed, current through the inductor,

∴ \(I_0=\frac{e}{R}=\frac{15}{0.15 \times 10^3}=0.1 \mathrm{~A}\)

Here, t = 1 ms = 1-3 s

The time constant of the LR circuit,

∴ \(t_0=\frac{L}{R}=\frac{0.03}{0.15 \times 10^3}=2 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~s}\)

∴ \(\frac{t}{t_0}=\frac{10^{-3}}{2 \times 10^{-4}}=5\)

∴ \(I=I_0 e^{-t / t_0}=0.1 e^{-5}=\frac{0.1}{150}=0.67 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~A}\)

= 0.67 mA

The option 4 is correct

Question 30. An LCR circuit is equivalent to a damped pendulum. In an LCR circuit, the capacitor is charged to Q0 and then connected to the L and R as shown below:

Alternating Current LCR Circuit Is Equivalent To A Damped Pendulum

If a student plots graphs of the square of maximum charge (Q2max) on a capacitor with time (t) for two different values L1 and L2(L1 > L2) of L then which of the following represents this graph correctly? (Plots are schematic and not drawn to scale)

Alternating Current Plots Graphs

Answer: 1.

Damping of the charge of the capacitance occurs at an exponential rate.

Also, the greater the value of L, the greater the energy loss due to R.

The option 1. is correct.

Question 31. An arc lamp requires a direct current of 10 A at 80V to function. It is connected to a 220 V (rms), 50Hz ac supply, and the series inductor needed for it to work close to

  1. 80 H
  2. 0.08 H
  3. 0.044 H
  4. 0.065 H

Answer: 4. 0.065 H

When the clamp functions with dc, V = 80V, I = 10 A

Therefore, resistance of the lamp, \(R=\frac{V}{I}=\frac{80}{10}=8 \Omega\)

When the lamp and the inductor are connected to an ac source, the impedance of the circuit,

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}\)

The electric current in the circuit,

∴ \(I=\frac{V^{\prime}}{Z}=\frac{V^{\prime}}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}} \text { or, } R^2+\omega^2 L^2=\left(\frac{V^{\prime}}{I}\right)^2\)

or, \(8^2+\omega^2 L^2=\left(\frac{220}{10}\right)^2 \text { or, } \omega^2 L^2=(22)^2-8^2\)

or, \(L=\frac{\sqrt{22^2-8^2}}{\omega}=\frac{\sqrt{30 \times 14}}{2 \pi \times 50}=0.065 \mathrm{H}\)

The option 4 is correct.

Question 32. For an RLC circuit driven with a voltage of amplitude vm and frequency \(\omega_0=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\) the current exhibits resonance. The quality factor, Q is given by

  1. \(\frac{R}{\left(\omega_0 C\right)}\)
  2. \(\frac{C R}{\omega_0}\)
  3. \(\frac{\omega_0 L}{R}\)
  4. \(\frac{\omega_0 R}{L}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{\omega_0 L}{R}\)

Q factor of RLC circuit = \(\frac{\omega_0}{\Delta \omega}=\frac{\omega_0}{\frac{R}{L}}=\frac{\omega_0 L}{R}\)

The option 3 is correct.

Question 33. In an ac circuit, the instantaneous emf and current is given by e = 100 sin 30t; \(i=20 \sin \left(30 t-\frac{\pi}{4}\right)\).

In one cycle of ac, the average power consumed by the circuit and the wattless current are, respectively

  1. \(\frac{50}{\sqrt{2}}, 0\)
  2. 50,0
  3. 50,10
  4. \(\frac{1000}{\sqrt{2}}, 10 \)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{1000}{\sqrt{2}}, 10 \)

⇒ \(P_{\mathrm{avg}}=e_{\mathrm{rms}} i_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \phi_{3 \mathrm{~b}}=\frac{100}{\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{20}{\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\left [∵ \phi_{9 \mathrm{rg}}, \frac{\pi}{4}\right]\)

= \(=\frac{1000}{\sqrt{2}}\)

The wattless current, \(i=i_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \phi=\frac{20}{\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=10\)

The option 4 is correct.

Question 34. A transformer having an efficiency of 90% is working on 200V and 3kW power supply. If the current in the secondary coil is 6A, the voltage across the secondary coil and the current in the primary coil respectively are

  1. 300V, 15A
  2. 450V, 15A
  3. 450V, 13.5A
  4. 600V, 15A

Answer: 2. 450V, 15A

Power of the secondary coil, Ps = VpIp

∴ \(I_p=\frac{3 \times 1000}{200}=15 \mathrm{~A}\)

Power of the secondary coil, Ps = V$IS

∴ \(V_s=\frac{P_s}{I_s}=\frac{P_p \times \frac{90}{100}}{6}=3 \times 1000 \times \frac{90}{100} \times \frac{1}{6}=450 \mathrm{~V}\)

The option 2 is correct.

Question 35. A resistance R draws power P when connected to an ac source. If an inductance is now placed in series with the resistance, such that the impedance of the circuit becomes Z, the power drawn will be:

  1. \(P\left(\frac{R}{Z}\right)^2\)
  2. \(P \sqrt{\frac{R}{Z}}\)
  3. \(P\left(\frac{R}{Z}\right)\)
  4. P

Answer: 1. \(P\left(\frac{R}{Z}\right)^2\)

The rms currents in the first and second cases are \(I=\frac{E}{R} and I^{\prime}=\frac{E}{Z}\), respectively.

∴ The pure inductor does not draw any power, then the respective powers drawn are \(P=I^2 R=\left(\frac{E}{R}\right)^2 R=\frac{E^2}{R}\)

and \(P^{\prime}=I^{\prime 2} R=\left(\frac{E}{Z}\right)^2 R=\frac{E^2}{R}\left(\frac{R}{Z}\right)^2=P\left(\frac{R}{Z}\right)^2\)

Option 1 is correct.

Question 36. A small signal voltage V(t) = V0 sinty t is applied across an ideal capacitor C.

  1. Over a full cycle, the capacitor C does not consume any energy from the voltage source
  2. Current I(t) is in phase with voltage V(t)
  3. Current I(t) leads voltage V(t) by 180°
  4. Current I(t) lags voltage V(t) by 90°

Answer: 1. Over a full cycle, the capacitor C does not consume any energy from the voltage source

The option 1 is correct

Question 37. An inductor 20mH, a capacitor 50 μF, and a resistor 40 Ω connected in series across a source of emf V = 10 sin 340 t. The power loss in ac circuit is

  1. 0.67W
  2. 0.76W
  3. 0.89W
  4. 0.51 W

Answer: 4. 0.51 W

Here, ω = 340 Hz

Inductive reactance, XL = ωL = 340 x 20 x 10-3 = 6.8H

Capacitive reactance, \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{340 \times 50 \times 10^{-6}}=58.8 \Omega\)

Resistance, R = 40 Ω

Therefore, the impedance of the circuit,

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(X_C-X_L\right)^2}\)

= \(\sqrt{40^2+(58.8-6.8)^2}=65.6 \Omega\)

Now, rms value of current, \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{Z}=\frac{10}{\sqrt{2} \times 65.6}\)

Power dissipated in the circuit,

P = \(V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \theta=V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \frac{R}{Z}\)

= \(\frac{10}{\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{10}{\sqrt{2} \times 65.6} \times \frac{40}{65.6}=0.46 \mathrm{~W} \approx 0.51 \mathrm{~W}\)

The option 4 is correct.

Short Answer Questions on AC Voltage and Current Relationships

Question 38. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 100 μF, and a resistor 50 Ω are connected in series across a source of emf, V= 10 sin 314t. The power of the circuit is

  1. 2.74 W
  2. 0.43 W
  3. 0.79 W
  4. 1.13 W

Answer: 3. 0.79 W

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)

= \(\sqrt{(50)^2+\left[314 \times 20 \times 10^{-3}-\frac{1}{314 \times 100 \times 10^{-6}}\right]^2}\)

= 56.16 Ω

The power loss in the circuit,

∴ \(P=\left(\frac{V_{\mathrm{rms}}}{Z}\right)^2 \cdot R=\left(\frac{\frac{10}{\sqrt{2}}}{56.16}\right)^2 \times 50=0.79 \mathrm{~W}\)

The option 3 is correct.

Question 39. An alternating voltage given by V = 140 sin 314t is connected across a pure resistor of 50 Ω. Find

  1. The frequency of the source
  2. The rms current through the resistor.

Answer:

V = 140 sin 314t = V0 sin ωt

1. Frequency of the source,

∴ \(n=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}=\frac{314}{2 \times 3.14}=50 \mathrm{~Hz}\)

2. \(I=\frac{V}{R}=\frac{140}{50} \sin 314 t=2.8 \sin 314 t=I_0 \sin \omega t\)

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}} \approx \frac{2.8}{1.4}=2 \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 40.

  1. For a given ac i = im sin ωt, show that the average power dissipated in a resistor R over a complete cycle is \(\frac{1}{2} i_m^2 R\)
  2. A light bulb is rated at 100 W for a 220 V ac supply. Calculate the resistance of the bulb.

Answer:

1. i = im sin cot, so v = im R sin cot

Power dissipated, P = vi = i2mRsin2cot

The average of sin2tot over a complete cycle = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

∴ Average power dissipated,

= \(\bar{P}=i_m^2 R \cdot \frac{1}{2}=\frac{1}{2} i_m^2 R\)

2. \(P=\frac{V^2}{R} \quad \text { or, } R=\frac{V^2}{P}=\frac{(220)^2}{100}=484 \Omega\)

Question 41. Why is the use of ac voltage preferred over dc voltage? Give two reasons.

Answer:

  1. Alternating voltages can be stepped up or down quite easily.
  2. Alternating power can be transmitted over a long distance with very small thermal loss using a high voltage-low current ac supply.

Question 42. A voltage V = V0sincut is applied to a series LCR circuit Derive the expression for the average power dissipated over a cycle. Under what condition is

  1. No power dissipated even though the current flows through the circuit,
  2. Maximum power dissipated in the circuit?

Answer:

  1. No power is dissipated if the pure resistance R in the circuit is zero.
  2. Maximum power is dissipated if the inductive and capacitative reactances cancel each other i.e., when the circuit impedance becomes equal to the pure resistance of the circuit(Z = R).

Question 43. In a series LR circuit, XL = R, and the power factor of the circuit is P1. When a capacitor with capacitance C such that XC = XL is put in series, the power factor becomes P2. Find out P1/P2.

Answer:

In a series LR circuit, power factor \(\left(P_1\right)=\frac{R}{Z}\)

Here, Z = impedance = \(\sqrt{R^2+X_L^2}\)

Here, \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+R^2}=\sqrt{2} R\)

∴ \(P_1=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

In a series LCR Circuit, power factor \(\left(P_2\right)=\frac{R}{Z}\)

Where \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(X_L-X_C\right)^2}=R\)

∴ P2 = 1

Hence, \(\frac{P_1}{P_2}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 44.

  1. When an ac source is connected to an ideal capacitor, show that the average power supplied by the source over a complete cycle is zero.
  2. A bulb is connected in series with a variable capacitor and an ac source as shown. What happens to the brightness of the bulb when the key is plugged in and the capacitance of the capacitor is gradually reduced?

Alternating Current A Bulb Is Connected In Series With A Variable Capacitor And An Ac Source

Answer:

1. The instantaneous power supplied to the capacitor,

P = I0 cos(ωt) V0 sin(ωT)

P = I0 V0 cos(ωt) sin(ωt)

∴ \(P=\frac{I_0 V_0}{2} \sin (2 \omega t)\)

Therefore, the average power,

∴ \(\bar{P}=\frac{I_0 V_0}{2} \sin (2 \omega t)=\frac{I_0 V_0}{2} \sin (2 \omega t)\)

Now, the average of sin( 2<wt) over the cycle is zero.

∴ \(\bar{P}=0\)

2. The capacitance of the capacitor is gradually reduced. Therefore, the capacitive reactance \(X_C=\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}\) increases.

Therefore, essentially, the overall resistance of the circuit increases. This causes a reduction in the amount of current flowing through the circuit. Therefore, the brightness of the bulb reduces.

Question 45. A device X is connected to an ac source V = V0 sin ωt. The variation of voltage, current, and power in one cycle is shown in the following graph:

Alternating Current The Variation Of Voltage, Current And Power In One Cycle

  1. Identify the device X
  2. Which of the curves A, B, and C represent the voltage, current, and power consumed in the circuit? Justify your answer.
  3. How does its impedance vary with the frequency of the ac source? Show graphically.
  4. Obtain an an expression for the current in the circuit and its phase relation with ac voltage

Answer:

1. Device X is a capacitor.

2. B represents voltage because it is a sine wave. C represents current because current leads voltage by \(\frac{\pi}{2}\). A represents power because the average power cycle is zero.

3. Impendance, \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}\)

Alternating Current Impedance Vary With Frequency Of The Ac Source

4. \(C=\frac{q}{V}\)

∴ q = CV = CV0 sinωt [∵ V = V0sin t]

∴ Current, \(I=\frac{d t}{d q}=\frac{d}{d t}\left(C V_0 \sin \omega t\right)=\omega C V_0 \cos \omega t\)

= \(\frac{V_0}{\frac{1}{\omega C}} \cos \omega t\)

∴ \(I=\frac{V_0}{\dot{X}_C} \sin \left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right) \quad \text { or, } I=I_0 \sin \left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\)

In a pure capacitive circuit current leads voltage by \(\frac{\pi}{2}\).

Question 46. Find the value of the phase difference between the current and the voltage hi the series LCR circuit shown below. Which one leads in phase: current or voltage?

 

Alternating Current The Value Of Phase Difference Between The Current And The Voltage In The Series LCR Circuit

Answer:

Given, V = V0 sin(1000t +Φ), R = 4000, C = 2μF,

L = 100 mH.

The standard equation is given by,

V = V0 sin (ωt + Φ)

∴ ω = 1000 Hz

Now, XL = ωL= 1000 x 100 x 10-3 = 102 = 100Ω

and \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{1000 \times 2 \times 10^{-6}}=500 \Omega\)

The phase difference between the current and the voltage in the series LCR circuit is given by,

∴ \(\phi=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{X_C-X_L}{R}\right)\)

or, \(\phi=\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{500-100}{400}\right)=\tan ^{-1} 1\)

∴ Φ = 45°

Since, XC > XL, therefore current leads in phase.

Question 47. Without making any other change, find the value of the additional capacitor, to be connected in parallel with the capacitor C, to make the power factor of the circuit unity.

 

Alternating Current Power Factor Of The Circuit Unity

Answer:

To make the power factor of the circuit unity,

Alternating Current Make Power Factor Of The Circuit Unity

XC = XL

∴ \(\frac{1}{\omega\left(C+C_1\right)}=100 \text { or, } \frac{1}{1000\left(C+C_1\right)}=100\)

or, \(C+C_1=\frac{1}{10^5}\)

or, \(C_1=\frac{1}{10^5}-C=10^{-5}-0.2 \times 10^{-5}=0.8 \times 10^{-5}\)

or, C1 = 8μF

Concepts of Phase Difference in Alternating Current

Question 48.

  1. Draw a labeled diagram of a step-up Transformer. Obtain the ratio of secondary to primary voltage in terms of several turns and currents in the two coils.
  2. A power transmission line feeds input power at 2200 V to a step-down transformer with its primary windings having 3000 turns. Find the number of turns in the secondary to get the power output at 220 V.

Answer:

Alternating Current Step-up Transformer

1. When an alternating potential Vp is applied to the primary coil, an emf (ep) is induced in it.

∴ \(e_p=-N_p \frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

It resistance of the primary coil is low, Vp = ep

∴ \(V_p=-N_p \frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

As the same flux is linked with the secondary coil with the help of a soft iron core due to mutual induction, emf (es) is induced in it.

∴ \(e_s=-N_s \frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

If the output circuit is open then, Vs = es

∴ \(V_s=-N_s \frac{d \phi}{d t}\)

Thus, \(\frac{V_s}{V_p}=\frac{N_s}{N_p}\)

For an ideal transformer, Pout = Pin

or, IsVs = IpVp

∴ \(\frac{V_s}{V_p}=\frac{I_p}{I_x}=\frac{N_s}{N_p}\)

For setup transformer \(\frac{N_s}{N_p}>1\).

In the case of dc voltage, flux does not change. Thus no emf is induced in the circuit.

2. Given, Vp = 2200 V, Np = 3000, Vs = 220 V

We know, \(\frac{V_s}{V_p}=\frac{N_s}{N_p} \quad \text { or, } N_s=\frac{N_p \cdot V_s}{V_p}=\frac{3000 \times 220}{2200}\)

∴ Ns = 300

Question 49. A device X is connected across an ac source of voltage V= V0sincot. The current through X is given as \(I=I_0 \sin \left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\).

  1. Identify the device X and write the expression for its reactance.
  2. Draw graphs showing variation of voltage and current with time over one cycle of ac, for X.
  3. How does the reactance of device X vary with the frequency of the ac? Show this variation graphically.
  4. Draw the phasor diagram for the device X.

Answer:

1. Device X is a capacitor

∴ Capacitive reactance, \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}\)

Alternating Current Variation Of Voltage And Current With Time Over One Cycle Of Ac

Alternating Current Reactance Of The Device With Frequency

Alternating Current Phasor

Question 50. The teachers of Geeta’s school took the students on a study trip to a power generating station, located nearly 200 km away from the city. The teacher explained that electrical energy is transmitted over such a long distance to their city, in the form of alternating current (ac) raised to a high voltage. At the receiving end in the city, the voltage is reduced to operate the devices. As a result, the power loss is reduced. Geeta listened to the teacher and asked questions about how the ac is conveyed to a higher or lower voltage.

  1. Name the device used to change the alternating voltage to a higher or lower value. State one cause for power dissipation in this device.
  2. Explain with an example, how power loss is reduced if the energy is transmitted over long distances as an alternating current rather than a direct current.
  3. Write two values each shown by the teachers and Geeta.

Answer:

1. 1st part: A Transformer is a device used to change the alternating voltage to a higher or lower value. 2nd part: One cause for power dissipation in this device is copper loss. Generally, copper wire is used to make primary and secondary coils. Due to Joule’s heating, some energy is dissipated as heat energy.

2. At the electric power producing station, a set-up transformer is used to increase the alternating voltage up to several kilovolts. So the electric current flowing through transmission wires decreases. As Joule’s heating is proportional to the square of current, the loss of electrical energy across transmission wires decreases due to a decrease in current.

3. Two values shown by teachers are

  1. sense of responsibility,
  2. good practical knowledge. Two values shown by Geeta are—
    • curiosity to learn,
    • critical thinking.

 

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Questions And Answers

Physics Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Alternating Current Long Questions And Answers

Question 1. In an oscillating LC circuit the maximum charge on the capacitor is Q. When the charge Is stored equally between the electric and magnetic fields, what Is the charge on the capacitor?

Answer:

Maximum charge of the capacitor = Q

So total energy of the circuit = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C}\)

When the’ chat ge of the capacitor is q, then the energy stored in the electric field is \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{q^2}{C}\). At this stage energy stored in the magnetic field is \(\frac{1}{2} L i^2\).

If it is \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{q^2}{C}\), equal to the total energy

= \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{q^2}{C}+\frac{1}{2} L i^2=\frac{1}{2} \frac{q^2}{C}+\frac{1}{2} \frac{q^2}{C}=\frac{q^2}{C}\)

so, \(\frac{q^2}{C}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C} \quad \text { or, } q^2=\frac{Q^2}{2} \quad \text { or, } q=\frac{Q}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 2. In an LCR circuit, capacitance is changed from C to 2C. For the resonant frequency to remain unchanged what should be the change in the value of inductance L?

Answer:

Resonant frequency \(f_0=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

For f0 to be constant, LC = constant.

If C is made 2C and the changed value of L is L’

then, \(L C=L^{\prime} \cdot 2 C \quad \text { or, } L^{\prime}=\frac{L}{2}\)

Question 3. If the emf of an ac circuit is E = E0 sin ωt and current I = I0 cos ωt, what is the power dissipated in the circuit?

Answer:

∴ \(E=E_0 \sin \omega t ; I=I_0 \cos \omega t=I_0 \sin \left(\omega t+90^{\circ}\right)\)

So, phase difference, θ = 90°

Therefore, power factor = cos θ – cos90° = 0

i.e., power dissipated = 0

Question 4. What should be the nature of the graph of the impedance Z concerning frequency in an alternating LCR circuit?

Answer:

If f is the frequency, ω = 2πf

Impedance, \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^2}\)

If frequency, \(f_0=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

then \(\omega_0=2 \pi f_0=\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}} \quad \text { or, } \omega_0 L=\frac{1}{\omega_0 C}\).

Under this condition Z is minimum, i.e., Z = R.

If the frequency increases or decreases concerning this resonant frequency f0, Z will vary accordingly, as shown.

Alternating Current Nature Of Graph Of The Impedance

WBBSE Class 12 Alternating Current Q&A

Question 5. How does the wattless current conform to the principle of energy conservation?

Answer:

An alternating current through a pure inductor or pure capacitor is witnessed, which means that no part of the input energy is lost due to heating.

Instead, the electrical energy supplied from the alternating source is stored in the magnetic field of the inductor or the electrostatic field of the capacitor.

Because of this stored energy, the current continues to flow in the circuit, even if the alternating spruce is removed from the circuit.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Questions And Answers

Question 6. The current through a circuit is given by \(I=I_0 \sin (\omega t+\pi / 6)\) when the applied emf is V = V0sinωt. Find the power dissipated in the circuit in one complete cycle. Draw the. phasor diagram for the given current and voltage. What are the possible two elements in the circuit?

Answer:

Here, the current leads the voltage by a phase angle, \(\theta=\frac{\pi}{6}\)

So, the power dissipated in one complete cycle

∴ \(P=V_{\mathrm{rms}} I_{\mathrm{rms}} \cos \theta=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}} \frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\cos \frac{\pi}{6}\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} V_0 I_0 \cdot \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} V_0 I_0\)

This shows the phase relation for the given current and; voltage.

If the circuit contains two elements only, then these are a pure resistor R and a capacitor C, because the current leads the voltage in a CR circuit.

Alternating Current The Phase Relation For The Current And Voltage

Question 7. How does the resistance R change with the change in frequency of AC? Show graphically.

Answer:

As R is independent of frequency (f), the nature of the graph is a straight line, parallel to the frequency axis.

Alternating Current Resistance Change In Frequency

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Short Answer Questions on Alternating Current

Question 8. Sketch a graph to show how the reactance of an inductor varies as a function of frequency.

Answer:

We know, \(X_L=\omega L=2 \pi f L\) [∵\(f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\)]

where f is the frequency of ac supply. For a given coil, L is constant.

∴ \(X_L \propto f\)

So, Inductive reactance is directly proportional to the frequency of the current. Thus f-XL graph is a straight line passing through the origin.

Alternating Current Reactance Of An Inductor Varies As A Function Of Frequency

Question 9. Sketch a graph to show how the reactance of a capacitor varies as a function of frequency.

Answer: We know, \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{2 \pi f C}\) [∵ \(f=\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\)]

For constant C, \(X_C \propto \frac{1}{f}\)

So, the capacitive reactance is inversely proportional to the frequency of the current. Thus, the f-XC graph is a rectangular hyperbola.

Alternating Current Reactance Of An Capacitor Varies As A Function Of Frequency

Question 10. How does an inductor behave in a dc circuit?

Answer:

An inductor, having a pure resistance R and a self-inductance L, has an impedance, \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}\) Here, ω = 2πf, where f = frequency of the electric source. Naturally, f = 0 for dc circuits; so, ω = 0, and Z = R.

This means that the inductor behaves as a pure resistance in dc circuits, whereas its inductance L, plays no role.

Question 11. The LC oscillations can be compared to mechanical oscillations of a block of mass m attached to a spring of force constant k. Explain.

Answer:

The LC oscillations are comparable to mechanical oscillations of a spring-mass system since both of them are simple harmonic motions.

Alternating Current LC Oscillations Of A Block Of Mass

The general equation for the oscillation of a pure LC circuit,

∴ \(\frac{d^2 q}{d t^2}+\frac{q}{L C}=0\) → (1)

Again, the equation for the mechanical oscillation of a spring-mass system,

∴ \(\frac{d^2 x}{d t^2}+\omega_0^2 x=0\) → (2)

Where, \(\omega_0=\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\)

Comparing equations (1) and (2), we may write that the LC oscillations and the mechanical oscillations of the spring-mass system are analogous.

The analogy is given below in tabular form.

Alternating Current LC Oscillations And The Mechanical Oscillations Of Spring Mass System

Practice Questions on Alternating Current for Class 12

Question 12. In the given circuit, the switch K2 iS opened, and the switch If, is closed at time t = 0. At time t = t0, the switch K1 is opened, and the switch K2 is simultaneously closed. Sketch the variation of the inductor current I with time.

Alternating Current The Variation Of The Inductor Current With Time

Answer:

Between time t = 0 and t = t0, the equation for the inductor current, \(L \frac{d I}{d t}=E \quad \text { or, } I=\frac{E}{L} t\)

For time t > t0, the equation for the inductor current,

∴ \(L\left(\frac{d I}{d t}\right)=0\)

or, \(I=I\left(t_0\right)=\frac{E t_0}{L} \text { (constant) }\)

Thus I increase linearly with a slope for t = 0 to t = t0.

For time t ≥ t0, I becomes a constant \(\left(=\frac{E t_0}{L}\right)\)

The variation of current (I) with time (t) is shown.

Alternating Current Inductor Current

Question 13. Show that In the free oscillation of an LC circuit, the sum of energies stored In the capacitor and the Inductor is constant in time.

Answer:

Energy stored in the capacitor at time t,

⇒ \(U_E=\frac{q^2}{2 C}=\frac{q_m^2}{2 C} \cos ^2 \omega t\)

Energy stored in the inductor at time t,

⇒ \(U_B=\frac{1}{2} L I^2=\frac{L}{2}\left[q_m \omega \sin \omega t\right]^2\)

= \(\frac{q_m^2}{2} L \omega^2 \sin ^2 \omega t=\frac{q_m^2}{2 L C} L \sin ^2 \omega t=\frac{q_m^2}{2 C} \sin ^2 \omega t\)

Therefore total energy,

∴ \(U=U_E+U_B=\frac{q_m^2}{2 C}\left(\cos ^2 \omega t+\sin ^2 \omega t\right)=\frac{q_m^2}{2 C}\).

Therefore, for free oscillations of an LC circuit, the net energy remains constant at all times.

Alternating Current Energy Is Stored In The Capacitor And The Inductor Is Constant In Time

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Multiple Questions And Answers

Class 12 Physics Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current

Alternating Current Multiple Questions And Answers

Question 1. The internal resistance and internal reactance of an alternating current generator are Rg and Xg respectively. Power from this source is supplied to a load consisting of resisting Rg and reactance XL. For maximum power to be delivered from the generator to the load. The value of XL is equal to

  1. Zero
  2. Xg
  3. -Xg
  4. Rg

Answer: 3. -Xg

For maximum power, total reactance is zero.

Question 2. To reduce the resonant frequency in an LCR series circuit with a generator,

  1. The frequency of the generator should be reduced
  2. Another capacitor should be connected in parallel with the first capacitor
  3. The iron core of the inductor should be removed
  4. The dielectric in the capacitor should be removed

Answer: 2. Another capacitor should be connected in parallel with the first capacitor

∴ \(f=\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)

To reduce f either L or C or both has to be increased.

Question 3. Which of the following combinations should be selected for fine-tuning an LCR circuit used for communication?

  1. R = 20 Ω, L = 1.5 H, C= 35 μF
  2. R = 25 Ω, L = 2.5 H, C = 45 μF
  3. R = 15 Ω, L = 3.5 H, C= 30 μR
  4. R = 25 Ω, L = 1.5 H, C = 45 μF

Answer: 3. R = 15 Ω, L = 3.5 H, C= 30 μR

LCR circuit used for communication should have a high Q-factor, \(Q=\frac{1}{R} \sqrt{\frac{L}{C}}\).

Question 4. The current through an ac circuit first increases and then decreases as its frequency is increased. Which among the following are most likely combination of the circuit?

  1. Inductorand capacitor
  2. Resistorandinductor
  3. Resistor and capacitor
  4. Resistor, inductor, and capacitor

Answer:

2. Resistorandinductor

4. Resistor, inductor and capacitor

Question 5. The current through an ac (series) circuit increases as the source frequency is increased. Which of the following is the most suitable combination of the circuit?

  1. Only resistor
  2. A resistor and an inductor
  3. A resistor and a capacitor
  4. Only capacitor

Answer:

3. Resistor and a capacitor

4. Only capacitor

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Alternating Current Multiple Questions And Answers

WBBSE Class 12 Alternating Current MCQs

Question 6. When an ac voltage of 220 V is applied to a capacitor C

  1. The maximum voltage between plates is 220 V
  2. The current is in phase with the applied voltage
  3. The charge on the plates is in phase with the applied voltage
  4. The power delivered to the capacitor is zero

Answer:

3. The charge on the plates is in phase with the applied voltage

4. Power delivered to the capacitor is zero

P = vrms Irms cos Φ

∴ P = 0 [∴ Φ = 900 ]

Question 7. The line that draws the power supply to your house has

  1. Zero average current
  2. 220 V average voltage
  3. Voltage and current out of phase by 90°
  4. Voltage and current possibly differ in phase Φ such that \(|\phi|<\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Answer:

1. Zero average current

4. Voltage and current possibly differing in phase <p such that \(|\phi|<\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Since the line draws ac, the average current is zero. Again, since the line has some resistance (R ≠ 0), there is some phase difference between the voltage and current.

Question 8. An alternating current is given by the equation \(I=i_1 \sin \omega t+i_2 \cos \omega t\). The rms current is given by

  1. \(\left(i_2+i_1\right) / \sqrt{2}\)
  2. \(\left(i_2-i_1\right) / \sqrt{2}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\left\{\left(i_1^2+i_2^2\right) / 2\right\}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\left\{\left(i_1^2+i_2^2\right) /(\sqrt{2})\right\}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{\left\{\left(i_1^2+i_2^2\right) / 2\right\}}\)

Question 9. An ac having a peak value of 1.41 A is used to heat a wire. A dc producing the same heating rate will be of

  1. 1.41 A
  2. 2.0 A
  3. 0.705 A
  4. 1.0 A

Answer: 4. 1.0 A

Question 10. The general equation for the instantaneous voltage of a 50 Hz generator with a peak voltage of 220 V is

  1. 220 sin 50 πt
  2. 220 sin l00 πf
  3. ± 220 sin l00 πt
  4. 220 sin 25 π t

Answer: 2. 220 sin l00 πf

Question 11. The relation between angular velocity (ω) and driving frequency (f) of an alternating current is

  1. ω = 27 πf
  2. \(\omega=\frac{2 \pi}{f}\)
  3. \(f=\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\)
  4. f =27 πω

Answer: 1. ω = 27 πf

Question 12. The form factor of an alternating voltage is the ratio of

  1. Peak value and rms value
  2. Peak value and average value
  3. rms value and average value
  4. rms value and peak value

Answer: 3. rms value and average value

Question 13. The value of an ac voltage at time 0 < t < \(\frac{\pi}{\omega}\) is given by V= V0 Sinot and at time \(\frac{\pi}{\omega} < t < \frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) is given by V = -V0 Sin cyf. The average value of V for a complete cycle is

  1. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  2. \(\left(\frac{2}{\pi}\right) \mathrm{v}_0\)
  3. \(\frac{V_0}{2}\)
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. \(\left(\frac{2}{\pi}\right) \mathrm{v}_0\)

Question 14. The rms value of the potential difference V is shown.

Alternating Current Potential Difference

  1. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{3}}\)
  2. \(V_0\)
  3. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{V_0}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Hint: In this case, V = V0, when 0 ≤ t ≤ \(\frac{T}{2}\)

= 0, when \(\frac{T}{2}\) ≤ t ≤ T

∴ \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}^2=\frac{\int_0^T V^2 d t}{\int_0^T d t}=\frac{1}{T} V_0^2\left[\int_0^{T / 2} d t\right]=\frac{V_0^2}{2}\)

or, \(V_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Short Answer Questions on Alternating Current

Question 15. The rms value and frequency of an AC are 5A and 50 Hz respectively. The value of the current after \(\frac{1}{300}\)s from the time when its value becomes zero is

  1. \(5 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~A}\)
  2. \(5 \sqrt{\frac{3}{2}} \mathrm{~A}\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{6} \mathrm{~A}\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{\sqrt{2}} \mathrm{~A}\)

Answer: 2. \(5 \sqrt{\frac{3}{2}} \mathrm{~A}\)

Hint: \(I=I_0 \sin \omega t=5 \sqrt{2} \sin \left(100 \pi \times \frac{1}{300}\right)\)

= \(5 \sqrt{2} \times \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}=5 \sqrt{\frac{3}{2}} \mathrm{~A}\)

Series AC Circuits with R, L, C

Question 16. In an AC circuit containing capacitance, only the current

  1. Leads the voltage by 180°
  2. Is in phase with the voltage
  3. Leads the voltage by 90°
  4. Lags behind the voltage by 90°

Answer: 3. Leads the voltage by 90°

Question 17. In an LR circuit, the phase angle between alternating voltage and alternating current is 45°. The value of inductive reactance will be

  1. \(\frac{R}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{R}{2}\)
  3. R
  4. Data insufficient

Answer: 3. R

Question 18. In an LCR series circuit, the capacitance is reduced to one-fourth, when in resonance. What change should be made in the inductance, so that the circuit remains in resonance?

  1. 4 times
  2. \(\frac{1}{4} \text { times }\)
  3. 8 times
  4. 2 times

Answer: 1. 4 times

Question 19. The phase difference between V and 1 of an LCR circuit in series resonance is

  1. π
  2. \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
  3. \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
  4. 0

Answer: 4. 0

Question 20. The reactance of an inductor of inductance \(\frac{1}{\pi}\) at frequency 50 Hz is

  1. \(\frac{50}{\pi} \Omega\)
  2. \(\frac{\pi}{50} \Omega\)
  3. 100
  4. 50

Answer: 3. 100

Question 21. which quantity in an AC circuit is not dependent on frequency?

  1. Resistance
  2. Impedance
  3. Inductive reactance
  4. Capacitative reactance

Answer: 1. Resistance

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 22. The condition of getting maximum current in an LCR series circuit is

  1. \(X_L=0\)
  2. \(X_C=0\)
  3. \(X_L=X_C\)
  4. \(R=X_L-X_C\)

Answer: 3. \(X_L=X_C\)

Real-Life Applications of AC Power Systems

Question 23. The series resonant frequency of an LCR circuit is f. If the capacitance is made,4, times the initial value, then the resonant frequency will become

  1. f/2
  2. 2f
  3. f
  4. f/4

Answer: 1. f/2

Question 24. A coil has a resistance of 30 Ω and inductive reactance of 20 Ω at 50 Hz frequency. If an AC source of 200V, 100 Hz is connected across the coil, the current in the coil will be

  1. 2.0 A
  2. 4.0 A
  3. 8.0 A
  4. \(\frac{20}{\sqrt{13}} \mathrm{~A}\)

Answer: 2. 4.0 A

Hint: In this case, R = 30Ω and XL = 20 Ω

∴ XL = ωL = 2nfL \f- frequency]

∴ \(\frac{X_L}{X_L^{\prime}}=\frac{f}{f^{\prime}} \quad \text { or, } \quad X_L^{\prime}=X_L \times\left(\frac{f^{\prime}}{f}\right)=20 \times\left(\frac{100}{50}\right)=40 \Omega\)

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{R^2+X_L^{\prime 2}}=\sqrt{(30)^2+(40)^2}=50\)

∴ [laex]I=\frac{V}{Z}=\frac{200}{50}=4 \mathrm{~A}[/latex]

Question 25. A fully charged capacitor C with initial charge q0 is connected to a coil of self-inductance L at t = 0. The time at which the energy is stored equally between the electric and the magnetic field is

  1. \(\frac{\pi}{4} \sqrt{L C}\)
  2. \(2 \pi \sqrt{L C}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{L C}\)
  4. \(\pi \sqrt{L C}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{\pi}{4} \sqrt{L C}\)

Hint: During discharging of capacitor C through inductance L, let at any instant, charge in capacitor be Q.

∴ Q = Q0 sin ωt

Maximum energy storedin capacitor \(=\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q_0^2}{C}\)

Let at an instant t, the energy be stored equally between electric and magnetic field. The energy stored in the electric field instant t is

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^2}{C}=\frac{1}{2}\left[\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q_0^2}{C}\right] \quad \text { or, } Q^2=\frac{Q_0^2}{2}\)

or, \(Q=\frac{Q_0}{\sqrt{2}} \quad \text { or, } Q_0 \sin \omega t=\frac{Q_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)

or, \(\omega t=\frac{\pi}{4} \quad \text { or, } t=\frac{\pi}{4 \omega}=\frac{\pi \sqrt{L C}}{4}\)  [∵\(\omega = \frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)

Question 26. A voltage V0 sincot is applied across a series combination of resistance R and inductor L. The peak value of the current in the circuit is

  1. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}\)
  2. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2-\omega^2 L^2}}\)
  3. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}} \sin \omega t\)
  4. \(\frac{V_0}{R}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{V_0}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}\)

Question 27. When an ideal choke is connected to an AC source of 100 V and 50 Hz, a current of 8 A flows through the circuit A current of 10A flows through the circuit when pure resistors are connected instead of the choke coil. If the two are connected in series with an AC supply of 100V and 40 Hz, then the current in the circuit is

  1. 10 A
  2. 8 A
  3. \(5 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~A}\)
  4. \(10 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~A}\)

Answer: 3. \(5 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~A}\)

⇒ \(X_L=\omega L=\frac{100}{8}\)

∴ \(L=\frac{100}{8 \omega}=\frac{1}{8 \pi} \text { and } R=\frac{100}{10}=10 \Omega\)

When R and L are connected in series,

∴ \(Z=\sqrt{\left(\frac{1}{8 \pi} \times 2 \pi \times 40\right)^2+10^2}=10 \sqrt{2}\)

∴ \(I=\frac{V}{Z}=\frac{100}{10 \sqrt{2}}=5 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 28. In an LCR circuit voltages across R, L, and C are 10V, 10V, and 20V respectively. The voltage between the two endpoints of the whole combination is

  1. 30 V
  2. 10√3 V
  3. 20 V
  4. 10√2 V

Answer: 4. 10√2 V

Question 29. In an ac circuit alternating voltage E = 200√2 sin100t volt is connected to a capacitor of capacity 1μF. The rms value of the current in the circuit is

  1. 10 mA
  2. 100 mA
  3. 200 mA
  4. 20 mA

Answer: 4. 20 mA

Hint: From the given equation, we may write

E0 = 200√2 V and ω = 100 rad/s

∴ \(X_C=\frac{1}{\omega C}=\frac{1}{100\left(1 \times 10^{-6}\right)}=10^4 \Omega\)

∴ \(I_{\mathrm{rms}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{X_C}=\frac{\frac{E_0}{\sqrt{2}}}{X_C}=\frac{\frac{200 \sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{2}}}{10^4}=20 \mathrm{~mA}\)

Practice Problems on Alternating Current

Question 30. In the given network, readings of the ammeter (A) and the voltmeter (V) are respectively

Alternating Current Readings Of Ammeter And The Voltmeter

  1. 800 V, 2 A
  2. 220 V, 2.2 A
  3. 300 V, 2 A
  4. 100 V, 2 A

Answer: 2. 800 V, 2 A

Power in AC Circuits

Question 31. The power factor of an LR circuit carrying an ac of angular frequency ω is

  1. \(\frac{R}{\omega L}\)
  2. \(\frac{\omega L}{R}\)
  3. \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2-\omega^2 L^2}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2+\omega^2 L^2}}\)

Question 32. One of the conditions for getting a wattless current in an ac circuit is

  1. I = 0
  2. C = 0
  3. R = 0
  4. L = C

Answer: 3. R = 0

Question 33. If an emf E = E0 cos ωt is applied to a circuit, the current becomes I = I0 cos ωt What is the power factor of the circuit?

  1. Zero
  2. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  3. 1

Answer: 3. 1

Question 34. In an ac circuit, V and I are given by V = 100sin(100 t) V, and I = \(100 \sin \left(100 t+\frac{\pi}{3}\right)\) A respectively. The power dissipated in the circuit is

  1. 104 W
  2. 10 W
  3. 2500 W
  4. 5 W

Answer: 3. 2500 W

Hint: From the given equations for V we get,

v0  = 100 v, I0 and θ = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)

Power, P = \(\frac{V_0 I_0}{2} \cos \theta=\frac{100 \times 100}{2} \cos \frac{\pi}{3}=2500 \mathrm{~W}\)

LC Oscillations

Question 35. The inductance and capacitance in a closed circuit are 20 mH and 2μF respectively. The natural frequency will be

  1. 796 Hz
  2. 5000 Hz
  3. 40 Hz
  4. 31400 Hz

Answer: 1. 796 Hz

Question 36. For an LC oscillator which one of the following is not true?

  1. It converts DC to AC current
  2. It can be used as a filter
  3. It can sustain stable oscillations only for frequencies less than the resonance frequency
  4. The resonance frequency is radians per second

Answer: 3. It can sustain stable oscillations only for frequencies less than the resonance frequency

AC Generator and Transformer

Question 37. An ideal transformer is used to decrease an alternating voltage from 880 V to 220 V. If the number of turns of its primary coil is 4000, then what is that in the secondary coil?

  1. 16000
  2. 4000
  3. 2000
  4. 1000

Answer: 4. 1000

Common Questions on AC Theory and Applications

Question 38. The core of any transformer is laminated to

  1. Increase the secondary voltage
  2. Reduce the energy loss due to eddy currents
  3. Reduce the energy loss due to hysteresis
  4. Make it robust

Answer: 2. Reduce the energy loss due to eddy currents

Question 39. In a non-ideal transformer, the primary and secondary voltages and currents are V1, I1, and V2, I2 respectively. The efficiency of the transformer is

  1. \(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\)
  2. \(\frac{I_2}{I_1}\)
  3. \(\frac{V_2 I_2}{V_1 I_1}\)
  4. \(\frac{V_1 I_1}{V_2 I_2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{V_2 I_2}{V_1 I_1}\)

Question 40. The turns ratio of an ideal transformer is 1: n. The input-to-output power transfer ratio is

  1. 1:1
  2. l:n
  3. n:1
  4. 1: n2

Answer: 1. 1:1

Question 41. For the circuit,

Alternating Current The Circuit

  1. Mean value = I0
  2. rms value = \(\frac{I_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  3. Form factor = 1
  4. Form factor = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Answer:

1. Mean value = I0

3. Form factor = 1

Question 42. An emf of V = V0sin ωt is applied on a series LCR circuit. If there is no phase difference between the voltage and current, then

  1. \(I=\frac{V_0}{R} \sin \omega t\)
  2. \(\omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)
  3. Effective power = \(\frac{V_0^2}{R}\)
  4. Ratio of terminal potential difference across L and R = \(\frac{1}{\omega C R}\)

Answer:

1. \(I=\frac{V_0}{R} \sin \omega t\)

2. \(\omega L=\frac{1}{\omega C}\)

4. ratio of terminal potential difference across L and R = \(\frac{1}{\omega C R}\)

Question 43. A coil of resistance 8 Ω and self-inductance 19.1 mH is connected with an AC source of peak voltage 200 V and frequency 50 Hz

  1. Reactance due to induction = 0.955 Ω
  2. The impedance of the circuit = 10 Ω
  3. rms value of current = 10√2 Ω
  4. Power dissipated = 2000 W

Answer:

2. The impedance of the circuit = 10 Ω

3. RMS value of current = 10√2 Ω

4. Power dissipated = 2000 W

Question 44. If only a capacitor is connected to an AC circuit

  1. Wattless current is obtained
  2. The current is 90° ahead of the voltage
  3. The current lags the voltage by 90°
  4. Effective power is inversely proportional to cuC

Answer:

1. Wattless current is obtained

2. The current is 90° ahead of voltage

Examples of AC Circuit Calculations

Question 45. The alternating current in an alternating circuit is given by I – I0 sin ωt. In this case

  1. The time taken by the current to reach maximum value I0 from zero is \(\frac{\pi}{2 \omega}\)
  2. The time taken by the current to reach maximum value I0 from zero is \(\frac{\pi}{4 \omega}\)
  3. The time taken by the current to reach rms value from zero is \(\frac{\pi}{4 \omega}\)
  4. The time taken by the current to reach -I0 from zero is \(\frac{\pi}{\omega}\)

Answer:

1. The time taken by the current to reach maximum value I0 from zero is \(\frac{\pi}{2 \omega}\)

3. The time taken by the current to reach rms value from zero is \(\frac{\pi}{4 \omega}\)

Question 46. In a series LCR circuit the resonant frequency f0, alternating voltage V = V0 sin ωt and current I = I0 sin(ωt+ θ). So if frequency

  1. f < f0 then θ > 0
  2. f < f0 then θ < 0
  3. f > f0 then θ > 0
  4. f > f0 then θ <0

Answer:

1. f < f0 then θ > 0

4. f > f0 then θ <0

Question 47. In an ideal transformer, the number of turns in the primary and secondary is N1 and N2, and current and power in the input and output are I1, I2, and P1, P2 respectively. Then

  1. \(I_2=I_1 \frac{N_1}{N_2}\)
  2. \(I_2=I_1 \cdot \frac{N_2}{N_1}\)
  3. P2 = P1
  4. \(P_2=P_1 \cdot \frac{N_1}{N_2}\)

Answer:

1. \(I_2=I_1 \frac{N_1}{N_2}\)

3. P2 = P1

Question 48. L, C, and R represent the inductance, capacitance, and reactance respectively. Which of the following combinations have the same dimensions as that of frequency?

  1. \(\frac{1}{R C}\)
  2. \(\frac{R}{L}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)
  4. \(\frac{C}{L}\)

Answer:

  1. \(\frac{1}{R C}\)
  2. \(\frac{R}{L}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)

Question 49. In a resonant LCR circuit,

  1. The power factor is zero
  2. The power factor is one
  3. Dissipated in the resistor is zero
  4. The power dissipated in the capacitor is zero

Answer:

2. The Power factor is one

4. The Power dissipated in the capacitor is zero

Question 50. Two LR circuits are shown. The change in current in this circuit is shown. Choose the correct options.

Alternating Current Two LR Circuits

  1. R1 > R2
  2. R1 = R2
  3. L1 > L2
  4. L1 < L2

Answer:

2. R1 = R2

4. L1 < L2

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Quantum Theory Introduction

Quantum theory or quantum physics Is the mainstay of modern physics. This theory is primarily applicable to the microscopic world, i.e., the physics of the atomic domain. The study of tills brunch started almost at the beginning of the twentieth century.

In quantum theory, we come across those phenomena or facts that are beyond our common experience and are non-realistic. Scientists who established the main foundation of this theory were also surprised to see the inferences obtained horn theoretical analysis of the theory. However, nil experiments conducted so far have strengthened the base of the theory.

Quantized quantity and quantum

Some quantities, obtained in daily life, can have only chosen values. These values are obtained, generally, by multiplying a primary value by an integer. Such quandaries are called quantized qiiantldcs and the primary value is called a quantum of the respective quantity.

As, the currency is quantized and previously, in Indian currency, 1 paisa was its quantum. It was possible to pay 1 rupee 6 paise or 106 paise but payment of 106.5 paise was not possible.

Read and Learn More Class 12 Physics Notes

Scientist Max Planck propounded his quantum theory in 1900 AD. Despite the astounding success of the wave theory of light, this theory cannot explain phenomena like black body radiations, photoelectric effect, atomic spectra, etc. To explain bthe lack body radiation spectrum, Max Planck introduced quantum theory. Later, the concept of photon particles, introduced by Einstein, established the theory more firmly.

Properties of an electron

1. Charge: Electron is negatively charged. The magnitude of charge of an electron is,

e = 1.6 ×10-19 C in SI

= 4.8 × 10-10 esu of charge in the CGS system

From different experiments, we learned that the charge of a body is a quantized quantity and the quantum of charge is the charge of an electron (e). So values of charges can be +2e, -5e, 1000, etc. but values like 1.5e, -2.be are nonrealistic.

2. Rest mass: Rest mass of an electron

m0 = 9.1 × 10-31 kg = 9.1 × 10-28 g

If the speed of an electron In much less than the speed of light, there In no difference between its rest mass (m) and effective mass (m). Thus men of electron, m = m0

3. Kinetic energy of an electron electronvolt:

The velocity of electron Incrcane on being attracted by a positive potential and hence Its kinetic energy also Increases, On the other hand, when repelled by a negative potential, the velocity of the electron decreases. The kinetic energy of an electron Is usually expressed In the electronvolt (eV) unit.

WBCHSE class 12 physics notesElectronvolt Definition:

The change In kinetic energy of an unbound electron, as it travels across a potential difference of IV, is called 1eV.

1eV= charge of an electron × IV

= 1.6 × 10-19C × IV  = 1.6 × 10-19 J

∴ C.V = J

= 1.6 × 10-19×107 erg = 1.6 × 10-12 erg

Electronvolt Is a very small unit compared to erg or joule. Hence, It is mainly used In nuclear or atomic physics only.

1keV = 103eV; 1 MeV = 106eV

Quarks

The discovery of quarks by Gell-Mann In 1964 has destroyed the myth that nucleons (protons and neutrons) are the fundamental particles of matter that are incapable of further division and that the charge on the electron was the smallest possible, charge existing In nature.

Quarks have been identified as the fundamental charged particles constituting baryons and mesons. So far, six quarks with their corresponding antiquarks \((\bar{u} \bar{d} \bar{c} \bar{s} \bar{t} \bar{b}\)) have been detected: up (u), down (d), charm (c), strange(s), top (f), bottom (b), with electric charge +\(\frac{2}{3}\)e, and – \(\frac{1}{3}\) e [to be taken alternately in that order], e being the electronic charge.

Thus, for example, a proton is composed of u, u, d, while a neutron is composed of u, d, d, held by mediator particles called gluons. Mesons are composed of quark-antiquark pairs. Incidentally, in the current view.

All matter consists of three kinds of particles: Leptons, quarks, and mediators, (details are beyond the scope of the present discussion).

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation

WBBSE Class 12 Dual Nature of Matter Notes

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Quantum Theory Numerical Examples

1. What is the energy of a photoelectron, in electronvolt, moving with a velocity of 2 × 107 m .s-1? (Given, mass of electron = 9.1 × 10-28 g )
Solution:

Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10-28 g = 9.1 × 10-31 kg

The kinetic energy of the electron

= ½mv² = ½ × ( 9.1 × 10-31)×( 2 × 107)²J

= ½ × \(\left\{\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times\left(2 \times 10^7\right)^2}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\right\}\)eV

= 1137.5 eV

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Photoelectric Effect

Photoelectric emission Definition:

The emission of electrons from matter (metals and non-metallic solids) as a consequence of the absorption of energy from electromagnetic radiation of very short wavelengths (such as visible and ultraviolet radiation), is called photoelectric emission.

Observation of Hertz and Contemporary Scientists

In 1887 German scientist Hertz observed that when ultraviolet rays fell on the negative electrode of a discharge tube, electric discharge occurred easily.

Subsequently in Hallwach’s experiment two zinc plates were placed in an evacuated quartz bulb and when ultraviolet rays fell on the plate connected to the negative terminal of the battery, immediately a current was found to flow in the circuit. But when the ultraviolet rays fell on the positive plate, there was no flow of current. He also noticed that, as soon as the ultraviolet rays were stopped, the current also stopped. Hallwachs however could not explain this phenomenon

In 1900 Lenard proved that when ultraviolet rays fell on a metallic plate, electrons were emitted from the plate and current was constituted due to the flow of electrons. Since in this case, the flow of current is due to light, it is called the photoelectric effect (photo = light). For this phenomenon, light of short wavelength or high frequency is more effective than light of long wavelength or low frequency. Alkali metals.

For example: Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, etc., exhibit a photoelectric effect even in ordinary visible light

Lenard’s experiment

G is an evacuated glass bulb with a quartz window Q on its lower face C is a metal plate, kept at potential -V. Another plate A, having a hole at its center is kept at zero potential by earthing. Hence the potential difference between anode and cathode = 0- (-V) = V.

Now, the cathode is illuminated by a monochromatic beam of light, entering through the window. Here ultraviolet rays or visible light of small wavelengths are used according to the nature of cathode plate metal.

Suppose, due to the incidence of light, cathode C emits a beam of negatively charged particles having charge -q. These charged particles are attracted towards the positive plate A. So, the kinetic energy of each charged particle, just before reaching the plate is,

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=q V \quad \text { or, } \frac{q}{m}=\frac{v^2}{2 V}\) ………………………………… (1)

Where, m = mass of each charged particle and v = velocity of the charged particle

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Lenards Experiment

A beam of these particles, passing through the hole of the anode is incident on the plate P, which is connected to an electrometer to detect the current. Now, between A and P, a magnetic field B is applied perpendicularly upward concerning the plane of the paper.

Due to this field, the charged particles are forced to move in circular paths. By controlling the magnetic field B, the particles are made incident on the plate D where they follow a circular path of radius of curvature R. The electrometer, connected with the plate D shows the current. Here, the magnetic force, acting on each particle

⇒ \(\vec{F}=-q \vec{v} \times \vec{B}\)

As \(\vec{v} \text { and } \vec{B}\) both are perpendicularÿ to each other, the magnitude of this force,

F =  \(\vec{v}\) = qvBsin 90°

= qvB

This force acts, as a centripetal force for the revolving particle.

⇒ \(q v B=\frac{m v^2}{R} \quad \text { or, } \frac{q}{m}=\frac{v}{B R}\)

Or, \(\left(\frac{q}{m}\right)^2=\frac{v^2}{B^2 R^2}\)………………………………….(2)

Dividing the equation (2) by equation (1) we get,

⇒ \(\frac{q}{m}=\frac{2 V}{B^2 R^2}\) ……………………………………. (3)

The value of \(\) can be evaluated by putting the values of V, R, and B in equation (3). From the experimental result thus obtained, Lenard, had shown that the value of \(\frac{q}{m}\) is the same as the specific charge of the electron,\(\frac{e}{m}\)  (= 1.76 × 1011C . kg-1) previously known. From this result, it could be concluded that the emitted negatively charged particles from the cathode are electrons

Electrons emitted in this manner, are called photoelectrons. With proper arrangements, the motion of photoelectrons can be made unidirectional. The stream of unidirectional photoelectrons thus produced, develops a current, namely, photoelectric current

Work function

The minimum energy required to remove an electron from the surface of a particular substance to a point just outside the surface is called the work function of that substance.

Here the final position of an electron is far from the surface on the atomic scale but still close to the substance on a macroscopic scale.

Work function depends only on the nature of the metal and is independent of the method of acquiring energy by the electron. Work function is measured in electronvolt. Alkali metals like sodium and potassium have work functions lower than that of other metals but, nowadays, for photoelectric emission, suitable alloys are mostly used.

Short Notes on Wave-Particle Duality

Demonstrative Experiment

An evacuated glass bulb G with a quartz windowing is used. Through the window, a monochromatic beam of light is incident a plate T that can emit electrons. Plate T is generally coated. With an alkali metal (like sodium or potassium). When plate C is kept at a positive potential concerning T, it attracts photoelectrons emitted from T. Hence a current is set up in the circuit monochromatic.

This force acts, as a centripetal force for the revolving particle. qvB-Sg or, which can be recorded by the galvanometer G’. T is called photocathode and C is called anode. Rheostat Rh, in series with battery B, can be used to increase or decrease the potential difference V. Using the commutator C’, C can also be kept at negative potential concerning T.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Demonstrative Experiment

Ampere-Volt Characteristics Stopping Potential

Stopping Potential Definition:

The minimum negative potential of anode concerning photocathode, for which photoelectric current becomes zero, is called stopping potential

Keeping the frequency of light constant

Graphs are drawn showing the dependence of I on V; where I = photoelectric current and V = potential difference between anode and cathode. Here a monochromatic light is used so that the frequency (f), of the incident light remains constant. 1 and 2 in this graph, represent I-V characteristics for different intensities of incident light.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Keeoing Frequency Of Light Constant

Detailed study of this graph reveals the following facts:

  1. Saturation current: Characteristic curves become horizontal for higher values of V. This shows that saturation current has been achieved. So, all the electrons, emitted by the photocathode, have been collected by the anode.
  2. Effect of intensity of incident light: At constant V, with a decrease in intensity i.e., the brightness of the incident, monochromatic light, the photoelectric current also decreases. Photoelectric current is directly proportional to the intensity of the incident light.
  3. Stopping potential: A When a negative potential is applied to anode concerning the photocathode, photoelectric Current docs do not show hut decreases gradually with an Increase In negative potential on C.

This Indicates that photoelectrons possess some Initial kinetic energy due to which they can reach the anode, overcoming the repulsive force of negative potential, With an Increase In the negative potential of the anode, the photoelectric current becomes zero ultimately. The negative potential at this stage Is called the stopping potential, cut-off potential, or cut-off voltage, VQ

The value of stopping potential depends on two factors:

  1.  Nature of the surface of the photocathode and
  2. Frequency of the incident lightAnalysing graphs 1 and 2, we see that stopping potential VQ does not depend on the intensity of incident light.

An increase in the intensity of incident light only increases the t£p value of the saturation current

Keeping the intensity of light constant

Graphs are drawn showing the dependence of I on V; where = photoelectric current and V = potential difference between anode and cathode. Lights of different frequencies but of the same intensity are used as incident light on the cathode. In this figure, graphs 1 and 2 represent the I-V characteristic curves for different frequencies

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Keeping Intensity Of Light Constant

In this case, as the frequency of incident light on the photocathode increases the y-value of stopping potential also increases and vice versa. But SEflyÿtion current is independent of the frequency of light

Relation between kinetic energy of photoelectrons and stopping potential:

When, the anode potential becomes equal to the stopping potential V0, photoelectrons with even the highest kinetic energy, cannot reach the anode. Hence, the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron (Emax) = loss of energy of electron for overcoming negative potential V0.

When an electron of charge e overcomes a negative potential VQ, loss of energy of electron = eV0. Thus,

Emax = eV0 …………………….. (1)

Also, if the maximum initial velocity of the electron is vmax, then

⇒ \(E_{\max }=\frac{1}{2} m v_{\max }^2\)

m = Mass of electron

⇒  \(\frac{1}{2} m v_{\max }^2=e V_0\)

⇒  \(v_{\max }=\sqrt{\frac{2 e V_0}{m}}\)

The maximum kinetic energy of an electron Is independent of the Intensity of light

Dual nature of matter and radiation notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Photoelectric Effect Numerical Examples

Example 1. The stopping potential for monochromatic light of a metal surface is 4V. What is the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons?
Solution:

From the relation, £max = eV0 we can say that, when the stopping potential is 4 V, maximum kinetic energy, Emax = 4eV.

Practice Problems on De Broglie Wavelength

Example 2. For a metal surface, the ratio of the stopping potentials for two different frequencies of incident light is 1: 4. What is the ratio of the maximum velocities in the two cases? max 
Solution:

Stopping potential oc maximum kinetic energy. Again maximum kinetic energy ∝ (maximum velocity)². Hence, stopping potential ∝ . (maximum velocity)².  If v1 and v2 are the maximum velocities in the two given cases, respectively then

⇒ \(\frac{1}{4}=\left(\frac{v_1}{v_2}\right)^2\)

i.e., v1= v2

= 1:2

Threshold Frequency or Cut-off Frequency

Threshold Frequency Definition:

The minimum frequency of incident radiation which can eject photoelectrons from the surface of a sub¬stance, is called the threshold frequency for that substance.

Frequency versus stopping potential graph:

In photoelectricity, neither the stopping potential nor maximum energy of photoelectrons is a constant quantity. Magnitudes of both V0 and Emax depend on

  1. The frequency of the incident light and
  2. The nature of the surface of the substance used.

The relation between frequency and stopping potential for different metals is shown graphically

Characteristics of the graph:

For each substance, there is a certain frequency f0 of incident light, for which the maximum energy of photoelectrons becomes zero.

In other words, there is no emission of photoelectrons. Hence, whatever may be the intensity of incident radiation, no electron can leave the metal, surface for the light incident with a frequency equal to or less than f0 i.e., photoelectric emission stops. This f0 is the threshold frequency.

The maximum wavelength corresponding to the minimum frequency f0 is called the threshold wavelength. It is given by,

⇒ \(\lambda_0=\frac{c}{f_0}\) c= speed of light

Discussions:

  1. From what we see, the stopping potential or maximum kinetic energy increases as the frequency of incident radiation increases. Hence in practice, almost in all cases, ultraviolet rays are used, as the frequency of ultraviolet rays is much more than that of visible violet ray
  2. Alkali metals (For example,  sodium, potassium, cesium, etc.) emit photoelectrons even for comparatively low-frequency light.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Stopping Potential Or Maximum Kinetic Energy

Characteristics of Photoelectric Effect

  1. Photoelectric current is directly proportional to the intensity of the incident light.
  2. The maximum velocity or kinetic energy of the photoelectron is independent of the intensity of incident light. On the other hand, maximum velocity or kinetic energy increases with an increase in the frequency of the incident light.
  3. For a given material, there exists a certain minimum frequency (threshold frequency, f0) of incident light bel which no photoelectrohs are emitted. Photoelectric effect is usually prominent in the range of frequencies of yellow, to ultraviolet radiation.
  4. Threshold frequency is different for different materials. Photoelectrons emitted from the surface of a substance have any velocity between zero and maximum velocity.
  5. The emission of a photoelectron is an instantaneous process, which means that photoelectrons are emitted as soon as light falls on the metal surface. There is practically no time gap between these two incidents.
  6. The emission of photoelectrons makes the rest of the surface very slightly positively charged (this principle is followed in making photovoltaic cells). of electrons in, the photoelectric effect does not depend on the temperature of the surface

Important Definitions in Dual Nature of Matter

Photoelectric Cell

Photoelectric Cell Definition:

Cells, designed to convert light energy to electri¬ cal energy, based on the principle of the photoelectric effect, are photoelectric cells.

Photo-voltaic cell: 

In this cell, an emf is developed directly from the photoelectric effect. This cell is an electric cell as it works as a source of EMF without any aid of an auxiliary cell.

Description:

A copper plate is taken and on one surface, a layer of cuprous oxide (Cu2O) is deposited by the method of oxidation. Over this layer of Cu2O, using the evaporation technique, a very thin coating of gold or silver is applied. This coating is so thin that light, especially ultraviolet rays, can easily penetrate it and reach the layer of Cu2O.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Photo Electric Cell

Working principle:

When light Tails on Cu2O, photoelectrons are emitted. These electrons instantaneously spread over the gold or silver coating. As a result, this coating achieves a negative potential concerning the copper plate, i.e., an effective emf is developed between the copper plate and the gold or silver coating. This emf sets up a current in the load resistance (RL) used in the external circuit. This current is directly proportional to the intensity of incident light.

Use of photoelectric cells:

1. Automatic switch: In fire alarms, railway signals, streetlights, etc., automatic switches are made using photoelectric cells. QFJ Sound recording and reproduction: Photoelectric cells are used in sound recording and its reproduction, on the soundtrack of cinema and television.

2. Solar cell: A photo-voltaic cell is used to construct a solar battery. This battery is indispensable in spaceships and artificial satellites-

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Solar Cell

3. Television camera: In this device, the photoelectric cell is j used to convert optical images into video signals for television broadcasts.

4. Automatic counting device: A photoelectric cell is used to make an automatic counting device. The number of viewers entering or emerging from a hall can be counted with this device.

5. Automatic camera: A photoelectric cell is used in automatic cameras where the controlling of picture quality depends on the intensity of light.

Failure of Wave Theory of Light

The photoelectric effect cannot be explained by the concept of the wave theory of light. The following observations are in contradiction with the wave nature of light:

  1. Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons: According to wave theory, energy carried by light waves increases with an increase in the intensity of light. Hence, when the material surface is illuminated with highly intense light, the kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons will be very high and it will not have any upper limit. But from the value of stopping potential V0, we see that the kinetic energy of the photoelectron cannot be more than e V0.
  2. Threshold frequency: A highly intense light wave, even of a frequency less than threshold frequency f0, carries a large amount of energy. This energy is sufficient to cause photoelectric emission. But no photoelectron is emitted in such cases. On the other hand, even a very low-intensity light beam of frequency greater than f0 can start photoelectric emission.
  3. The photoelectric effect is instantaneous: The energy carried by light waves incident on the surface of a substance needs a little time to be centralized in the limited space of an electron. Hence, there should be a time gap between the incidence of light waves on the surface and the emission of photoelectrons from the surface. But the photoelectric effect is instantaneous; that means there is no time gap between incidence and emission

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Quantum Theory of Radiation

Photon:

It has already been stated that the photoelectric effect cannot be explained in terms of the wave theory of light. In 1905, Einstein used Planck’s quantum theory and introduced the concept of photon particles. Thus, he could explain the photoelectric effect. The particle concept of radiation is the basis of quantum theory.

The basic point of the theory is that electromagnetic radiation is not a wave by nature but consists of a stream of particles called photons.

Photons Properties:

The main properties of photons are:

  1. Photons are electrically neutral.
  2. Photons travel with the speed of light, which does change under any circumstances, (velocity of light, c = 3 × 108 m . s-8 )
  3. The energy carried by a photon, E = hf; where f = frequency of radiation and h = Planck’s constant. The energy radiated increases with the increased number of photons in its stream and hence the intensity of radiation also increases
  4. According to Einstein’s theory of relativity, the vast mass of a particle is zero, if it trawls at the speed of light Hence, the vast mass of each photon is zero.
  5. According to the theory of relativity, if the rest mass of a particle is m0(1 and its momentum is p, the energy of the particle,

E = \(\sqrt{p^2 c^2+m_0^2 c^4}\),  In case of a photon, m0 = 0 ,

Hence E = pc, or p = \(\frac{E}{C}\)  = hf/c. Thus, despite the photon being a massless particle, it has a definite momentum.

Planck’s constant

It is a universal constant

Unit of h in SI = \(\frac{\text { unit of } E}{\text { unit of } f}=\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{s}^{-1}}\) = j- s

Unit of h in CGS system = erg .s.

This unit is the same as the unit of angular momentum. Thus h is a measure of angular momentum

Value of h = 6.625 × 10-34J . s =  6.625 × 10-27J . s

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Relation between the wavelength of radiation and the photon energy

Energy of a photon, E = hf = \(\)

1 eV= 1.6. × 10-19J . s and 1 A° = 10-10m

Hence, expressing E in the eV unit and λ in the A° unit

λ A° = λ  × 10-10 m EeV = E × (1.6 ×10-19) J

Hence, E × (1.6 ×10-19) J =   \(\frac{\left(6.625 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{\lambda \times 10^{-10}}\)

Or,  E = \(\frac{\left(6.625 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right) \times \lambda \times 10^{-10}} \approx \frac{12422}{\lambda}\)

Usually, the number on the right-hand side is taken as 12400.

Hence

E = 12400/ λ(inÅ) eV

Dual nature of matter and radiation notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Quantum Theory Of Radiation Numerical Examples

Find the energy of a photon of wavelength 4950 A In eV ( h = 6.62 × 10-12  erg .s ). What is the momentum of this photon?
Solution:

A = 4950 A = 4950 ×10-8  cm

Hence energy of a photon

E = hf \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{4950 \times 10^{-8}}\)

= 4.012 × 10-12  erg

= \(\frac{4.012 \times 10^{-12}}{1.6 \times 10^{-12}}\)

= 2.5 eV

Momentum of photon

p = \(\frac{E}{c}=\frac{4.012 \times 10^{-12}}{3 \times 10^{10}}\)

= 1.34 × 10-22 dyn. s

Example 2. Find the photons emitted per second by a source of power 25W. Assume, the wavelength of emitted light = 6000A°. h= 6.62 × 10-34 J.s.
Solution:

λ = 6000 A° = 6000m × 10-10 ,c = 3 × 108 m.s-1

Number of photons per shroud emitted by a source of power P Is,

n = \(\frac{p}{h f}=\frac{p}{h c / \lambda}=\frac{P \lambda}{h c}\)

n= \(\frac{25 \times 6000 \times 10^{-10}}{6,62 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}\)

= 7.55 × 1019

Examples of Experiments Demonstrating Dual Nature

Example 3. The wavelength of ultraviolet light Is 3 × 10-5cm, What will be the energy of a photon of this light, in eV?  (C = 3 ×10-10 m.s-1 )
Solution:

Planck’s constant, h = 6.625 × 10-27  erg .s

Wavelength, λ = 3 × 10-5 cm

The energy of a photon

E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{\left(6.625 \times 10^{-27}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^{10}\right)}{3 \times 10^{-5}} \mathrm{erg}\)

= \(\frac{\left(6.625 \times 10^{-27}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^{10}\right)}{\left(3 \times 10^{-5}\right) \times\left(1.6 \times 10^{12}\right)} \mathrm{eV}\)

= 4.14 eV

Example 4. Work functions of three metals A, H, and C arc 1.92 eV, 2.0 eV, and 5.0 eV respectively. Which metal will emit photoelectrons when a light of wavelength 4100A is Incident on the metal surfaces?
Solution:

Energy of incident photon

E = hf

= \(h \cdot \frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{4100 \times 10^{-8}} \mathrm{erg}\)

= \(\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{1.6 \times 10^{-12} \times 4100 \times 10^{-8}} \mathrm{eV}\) ≈ 3.03 eV

Hence, this photon will be able to emit photoelectrons from metals A and B but not from C

Example 5. In a microwave oven, electromagnetic waves are generated having wavelengths of the order of 1cm. Find the energy of the microwave photon. (h = 6.33 × 10-34 J.s).
Solution:

= 1 cm = 10-2 m; c = 3 × 108 m .s-1

E = hf

= \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{10^{-2}}\)

= 1.989 × 10-23 J

= \(\frac{1.989 \times 10^{-23}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV

= 1.24 × 10-4 10 eV

Dual nature of matter and radiation notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Einstein’s Photoelectric Equation

Einstein made the following assumptions to explain the photoelectric effect.

Einstein’s postulates

IQ A beam of light is incident on a metal surface as streams of photon particles. The energy of each photon having frequency is, E = hf (h = Planck’s constant).

Incident photons collide with electrons of metal. The collision may produce either of the two effects: The o photon gets reflected with its full energy hf or the Q photon transfers its entire energy hf to the electron.

Einstein used the quantum theory of radiation to explain the photoelectric effect.

The entire energy hf of die incident photon, when transferred to an electron of the metal, is spent in two ways:

  1. A part of the energy is spent to release the electron from the metal whose minimum value is equal to the work function WQ of the metal. But, due to the interaction of positive and negative charges inside a metal, most of the electrons need more energy than WQ for release.
  2. Rest of the energy, changes to the kinetic energy of released electrons. These moving electrons are photoelectrons that can set up photoelectric current. If energy absorbed by the electron to leave from the metal surface is the least i.e., WQ, the emitted electron attains maximum kinetic energy

Hence, hf = W0+ Emax

Emax= hf – W0 ………………………..(1)

If the mass of an electron is m and the maximum velocity of a photoelectron is equation (1) we get,

½mv²max =  hf -W0 ……………………..(2)

Also, if V0 is the stopping potential for the incident light of frequency/, then Emax = eV0 (e = charge of an electron) Hence, from equation (1),

eV0 = hf-W0

Equations (1), (2), and (3) are practically the same. Each of these is called Einstein’s photoelectric equation. In most collisions of photons with electrons, there is no energy transfer and the photons are reflected with their full energy hf. Hence the probability of photoelectric emission from the metal surface is low and the strength of photoelectric current never becomes very high

Explanation of Photoelectric Effect by Quantum Theory

Einstein’s photoelectric equation is based on the quantum theory of radiation.

This equation correctly explains the following observations in the photoelectric effect:

1. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons:

Work function W0 is a constant for a fixed material surface; also the frequency of monochromatic light, f is a constant. Hence, Emax = hf- W0, is also a constant. Thus, for fixed wavelength or fixed frequency of incident light, whatever may be the intensity, emitted photoelectrons cannot attain kinetic energy more than Emax

2. Threshold frequency:

The work function, JV0 is also a constant for a fixed material surface. If the frequency of incident light is decreased then as evident from equation Emax. = hf- W0, the value of £max will come down to zero for a certain value of f = f0 (say).

0= hf0– W0 Or, hf0 = W0

Or,  f0 = \(=\frac{W_0}{h}\) …………………………………(1)

If the value of f happens to be below f0, the energy of the photoelectron turns out to be negative and there is no photoelectron emission. Hence, f0 is the threshold frequency. Putting W0 = hf0 in Einstien’s photoelectric equation, Emax  = hf – W0 ,we get,

Emax  = hf – hf0 = h( f- f Emax  = h (f -f0 ) ………………………………(2)

Also, if λ and λ0 are the wavelength of the incident light and”threshold wavelength for the. metal surface respectively, then

f = c/λ and f0= c/λ0

c = Speed of light

Putting these values in equation (2), we get

Emax=  \(h c\left(\frac{1}{\lambda}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)\) …………………………..(3)

Equations (2)equation. and (3) are the other forms of the arc of Einstein’s photoelectric equation.

3. Photoelectric emission is instantaneous:

Energy transfer takes place between a photon of energy hf and an electron In the metal due to their elastic collision. Hence, there is no delay in photoelectron emission after the incidence of light.

4. Dependence of photoelectric current on the intensity of incident light:

An increase in the intensity of incident light of a constant frequency increases the number of photons incident on the surface of the material.

Hence, the number of collisions between the photons and electrons increases. So, more electrons are emitted which increases photoelectric current This agrees with the results obtained experimentally

Graphical representations of Einstein’s equation

1. Frequency (f) versus stopping potential ( V0) graph:

From equation (3) we have,

eV0 = hf- W0

Or, V0 =  \(\frac{h}{e} f-\frac{W_0}{e}\)

The graph obtained by plotting V0 against f is a straight line of the type, y = mx + c Knowing the charge of an electron e,  Planck’s constant h can be calculated from the slope of the graph.

Work function W0 can be obtained from the Intercept \(\) in the y-axis. Also, the intercept with the x-axis gives the threshold frequency f0.

It is important to note that the gradient of the straight Line Is \(\) for all substances but Intercepts from y- and x-axes, and f0, respectively are different for different substances.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Graphical Representation Of Einsteins Equation

2. Frequency (f) versus maximum kinetic energy (Emax) graph:

From equation (1)

E0max = hf – W0

The graph obtained by plotting Emax against f is a straight line. Comparing the above relation with y = mx + c, we note

The slope of the graph is h, x -the axis Intercept is f0 and the y-axis intercept is – W0.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Frequency Versus Maximum Kinetic Energy

Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Notes

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Einstein’s Photoelectric Equation Numerical Examples

Example 1. The work function for zinc Is 3.6 eV. If the threshold frequency for zinc is 9 × 1014 cps, determine the value of Planck’s constant. (1eV = 1.6× 10-12 erg).
Solution:

Work function, W0 = 3.6eV = 3.6 ×  1.6 × 10-12 erg

Threshold frequency, f0 = 9 × 1014 cps = 9 × 1014 Hz

As, W0 = hf0

So, h = \(\frac{W_0}{f_0}=\frac{3.6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}}{9 \times 10^{14}}\)

= 6.4 x  10-27  erg.s

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Example 2. The maximum kinetic energy of the released photoelectrons emitted from metallic sodium, when a light Is an Incident on It, is 0,73 eV. If the work function of sodium Is 1.82 eV, find the energy of the Incident photon In eV. Find the wavelength of incident light. (h = 6.63 × 10-27erg s, eV = 1.6 × 10-12 erg )
Solution:

From Einstein’s photoelectric equation, Emax hf – W0, we get the energy of the incident photon as,

E = hf = Emax + W0 = 0.73 + 1.82 = 2.55 eV

Hence wavelength of incident light, \(\)

∴ λ = \(\frac{h c}{E}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{2.55 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}}\) cm

λ  = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10} \times 10^8}{2.55 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}}\)A°

λ = 4875 A°

Example 3. Light of wavelength 6000A° is Incident on. a metal. To. release an electron from the metal surface, 1.77 eV of energy Is needed. Find the kinetic energy of the fastest photoelectron. What is the threshold frequency of the metal (h = 6.63 × 10-27erg s, eV = 1.6 × 10-12 erg ).
Solution:

The energy of a photon,

hf = \(h \frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{6000 \times 10^{-16}} \mathrm{erg}\)

= \(\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{6000 \times 10^{-8} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}} \mathrm{eV}\)

= 2.07 eV

As per Einstein’s photoelectric equation,

Emax  = hf – W0= 2. 07- 1. 77 = 0. 3eV

Threshold frequency,

⇒ \(\frac{W_0}{h}=\frac{1.77 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}}{6.62 \times 10^{-27}}\)

= 4.28 × 1014 Hz

Conceptual Questions on Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle

Example 4. The photoelectric threshold wavelength for a metal is  3800A°. Find the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectron, when ultraviolet radiation of length 2000A° is incident on the metal surface. Planck’s constant, h = 6.62 × 1034 J s
Solution:

Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron,

Emax = hf-W0 = hf-hf0 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}-\frac{h c}{\lambda_0}\)

= hc \(h c\left(\frac{1}{\lambda}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)=h c \frac{\lambda_0-\lambda}{\lambda \lambda_0}\)

In this case, the wavelength of the incident light,

λ = 2000 A° = 2000 × 10-10 m = 2 × 10-7 m

Threshold wavelength

λ0 = \(3800 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}=3.8 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}\)

Hence, Emax  = \(\left(6.62 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right) \times \frac{(3.8-2) \times 10^{-7}}{3.8 \times 2 \times 10^{-14}} \mathrm{~J}\)

= \(\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8 \times 1.8}{3.8 \times 2 \times 10^{-7} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}\)

= 2.94 eV

Example 5. The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission from a metal surface is 3800 A. Ultraviolet light of wavelength 2600A° is incident on the metal surface, 

  1. Find the work function of the metal and
  2. Maximum kinetic energy of emitted photoelectron. ( h= 6.63  × 1027 erg.s )

Solution:

Threshold wavelength

λ0 = 3800 A° =  3800 × 108  cm

∴ Work function,

W0 – hf0 = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{3800 \times 10^{-8}} \mathrm{erg}\)

= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{3800 \times 10^{-8} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}} \mathrm{eV}\)

= 3.27 eV

As Per Einstein’s photoelectric equation, the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron, Emax = hf-W0

hf = kinetic energy of the incident photon

= hf0  \(h f_0 \times \frac{f}{f_0}=h f_0 \frac{c / \lambda}{c / \lambda_0}=h f_0 \frac{\lambda_0}{\lambda}\)

= \(3.27 \times \frac{3800}{2600}\)

= 4.78

Emax = 4.78 – 3.27 = 1.51 eV

Example 6. When radiation of wavelength 4940 A° is incident on a metal surface photoelectricity is generated. For a potential difference of 0.6 V between the cathode and anode, photocurrent stops. For another incident radiation, the stopping potential changes to 1.1V. Find the work function of the metal and wavelength of the second radiation. ( h= 6.63  × 1027 erg.s , e = 1.6 × 1019 C)
Solution:

For the first radiation, stopping potential V0 = 0.6V

∴ Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron,

Emax  = eV0 = 0. 6eV

Wavelength, A = 4940 A° = 4940 × 108 cm

∴ The energy of an incident photon

= hf = \(h \frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{4940 \times 10^{-8}}\)

= \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{4940 \times 10^{-8} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}}\)

= 2.5 eV

If the work function of the metal is WQ, from Einstein’s equation

Emax= hf – W0

Or,  W0 = hf – Emax

= 2.5 -0.6

= 1.9 eV

For the second radiation, V’0 = 1.1V

Hence, E’max = 1.1 eV

∴ E’max = hf- W0

Or, hf’ = E’max + W0 = 1.1 + 1.9

= 3.0 eV

Hence, \(\frac{h f}{h f^{\prime}}=\frac{2.5}{3.0} \text { or, } \frac{f}{f^{\prime}}=\frac{5}{6}\)

Or, \(\frac{c / \lambda}{c / \lambda^{\prime}}=\frac{5}{6} \quad \text { or, } \frac{\lambda^{\prime}}{\lambda}=\frac{5}{6}\)

Or, λ’ = \(\lambda \times \frac{5}{6}=4940 \times \frac{5}{6}\)

= 4117 A°(approx)

Example 7. A stream of photons of energy 10.6 eV and intensity 2.0 W.m2 is incident on a platinum surface. The area of the surface is 1.0 × 104 m2 and its work function is 5.6 eV. 0.53% of incident photons emit photoelectrons. Find the number of photoelectrons emitted per second and the maximum and minimum energies of the emitted photoelectrons in eV. ( 1eV = 1.6 × 1019 J)
Solution:

If the intensity of incident light is I, the energy incident on a surface area A is IA. Hence, number of photons incident per second n = \(\frac{I A}{h f}\)

If x% of photons help to emit photoelectrons, the number of photoelectrons emitted per second,

N = \(n \times \frac{x}{100}=\frac{I A x}{h f \cdot 100}\)

Given, I = 2.0 W m2 , A = 1.0 × 104 m2

hf = 10.6 eV = 10.6 × 1.6 × 1019 J  and x = .0.53

N = \(\frac{2.0 \times 1.0 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.53}{10.6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 100}\)

= 6.25 × 1011

Minimum kinetic energy of emitted photoelectron = 0

Maximum kinetic energy, Emax = hf- W0 = 10.6 – 5.6 = 5 eV

Example 8. At what temperature would the kinetic energy of a gas molecule be equal to the energy of a photon of wavelength 6000A°? Given, Boltzmann’s constant,  k = 1.38 × 1023J K1, Plank’s constant , h = 6.625 × 1034 J. s
Solution:

Let the required temperature be TK. We know, the kinetic energy of a gas molecule

= \(\frac{3}{2} k T=\frac{3}{2} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times T\)

Again, the kinetic energy of the photon

= \(h f=\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{6000 \times 10^{-10}}\)

Hence,

= \(\frac{3}{2} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times T\)

= \(\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{6000 \times 10^{-10}}\)

T = \(\frac{2}{3} \times \frac{6.625 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 6000 \times 10^{-10}}\)

= 1.6 × 104 k

Example 9.  The ratio of the work functions of two metal surfaces is 1: 2. If the threshold wavelength of the photoelectric effect for the 1st metal is 6000 A°, what is the corresponding value for the 2nd metal surface?
Solution:

If the work function of 1st and 2nd metals be W0 and W’0 , respectively then

⇒ \(\frac{W_0}{W_0^{\prime}}=\frac{h f_0}{h f_0^{\prime}}=\frac{h c / \lambda_0}{h c / \lambda_0^{\prime}}=\frac{\lambda_0^{\prime}}{\lambda_0}\)

Or, \(\lambda_0^{\prime}=\lambda_0 \times \frac{W_0}{W_0^{\prime}}\)

= \(6000 \times \frac{1}{2}\)

= 3000 A°

Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Notes 

Example 10. The work function of a metal surface is 2 eV. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted from the surface for Incidence of light of wavelength 4140 A is 1 eV. What is the threshold wavelength of radiation for that surface
Solution:

From Einstein’s photoelectric equation,

Emax = hf-W0

Or hf = Emax  + W0= 1+2 = 3 eV

Now, \(\frac{h f}{W_0}=\frac{h f}{h f_0}=\frac{f}{f_0}=\frac{c / \lambda}{c / \lambda_0}=\frac{\lambda_0}{\lambda}\)

∴ λ0 =  \(\lambda \frac{h f}{W_0}\)

= 4140 ×\(\frac{3}{2}\)

= 6210A°

Example 11. The work function of a metal is 4.0 eV. Find the maximum value of the wavelength of radiation that can emit photoelectrons from the metal
Solution:

Let, threshold frequency = f0 , threshold wavelength λ0 and work function = W0

W0 =\(h f_0=\frac{h c}{\lambda_0} \text { or, } \lambda_0=\frac{h c}{W_0}\)

Given W0 = 4.0 eV = 4 × 1.6 × 1012 erg

We know, h = 6.60 × 1027 ergs. And

And c = 3 × 1010 cm .s1

λ0 = \(=\frac{6.60 \times 10^{-27} \times 3 \times 10^{10}}{1.6 \times 10^{-12} \times 4} \mathrm{~cm}\)

λ0 = 3.09375 × 105 cm≈ 3094 A°

Example 12. The maximum energies of photoelectrons emitted by a metal are E1 and E2 when the incident radiation has frequencies f1 and f2 respectively. Show that the Planks comment h and the work function W0 of the metal are \(\)
Solution:

According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation we here,

E= hf1 – W0 …………………………………(1)

E= hf2-W0 ……………………………..(2)

E1– E2 = h(f1-f2)

∴ h = \(\frac{E_1-E_2}{f_1-f_2}\) ………………………………….(3)

For E1 > E2

Again multiplying equation (1) by f2 and equation (2) by f1 we obtain.

E1f2= hf1f2 – f2W0 …………………………………..(4)

E2f1= hf1f2 – f1W0 ………………………………..(5)

Subtracting equation (5) from equation (4), we get

E1f2 – Ff = f1W0-f2W0= W2(f1-f2)

∴ W0 = \(\frac{E_1 f_2-E_2 f_1}{f_1-f_2}\)

Example 13. A photoelectric source is illuminated successively by monochromatic light of wavelength λ and λ/2 calculates the work function of the material of the source. If the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectric in the second case is 3 times that in the first case.
Solution:

We know the kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons,

k = hf-W0 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) – W0

In the first case,

K1 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) – W0 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) – W

In the second case,

K2 = \(\) – W0 = \(\) – W

It is given that, K2 = 3K1

Or, 2hc/λ = W

= 3(hc/λ – W)

2W = hc/λ

∴ W= hc/2λ

Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Nature Of Radiation: Wave-Particle Duality

Electromagnetic radiations, if assumed to be streams of photon particles, can explain phenomena like photoelectric emission, blackbody radiation, atomic spectra, etc. However the theory fails to explain other optical phenomena like Interference, diffraction, polarisation, etc.

On die other hand, the wave theory of radiation can interpret these phenomena successfully. Hence, depending on the type of experiment, radiation sometimes behaves like waves and sometimes like a stream of particles. Thus, theory and particle theory are not contradictory but complementary to each other. ‘Ibis Is railed wave-particle duality

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Matter Wave

It has already been stated that radiation shows both wave nature and particle nature. But the fact that matter can show wave nature was unimaginable till 1924 when French physical Louis de Broglie put forward the theory that a stream of material particles may behave as a wave.

Most probably the following reasons led him to such a conclusion:

  1. Nature prefers symmetry. Hence, two physical entities, matter and energy must co-exist In symmetry,
  2. If radiation can have both particle and wave nature would also possess particle and wave nature,
  3. We know that a beam of light, which Is a wave, can transfer energy and momentum at different points of a substance, ‘similarly, a stream of particles can also transfer energy and momentum at different points of a substance. Therefore, this stream of particles may be a matter wave.

de Broglie’s hypothesis:

Matter also consists of waves. For a radiation of frequency f, the energy of a photon

E =hf Or, E = hc/λ

∴ c = fλ

Or, λ = \(\frac{h}{E / c}=\frac{h}{p}\) ………………………………… (1)

Where p is the momentum of the photon.

As per de Broglie’s hypothesis, equation (1) is also applicable to an electron or any other particle. In this case, A gives the wavelength of the electron (or particle) of momentum p and is known as the de Broglie wavelength.

Thus, substituting the values of Planck’s constant h and momentum of the particle p in equation (1), we get the de Broglie wavelength of the wave associated with the moving particle.

Hence a stream of any particle behaves like a beam of light, i.e., like a wave. The wave is known as the matter wave. The wavelength of this matter wave,

λ = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{m \nu}\) ……………………………………. (2)

Where, m = mass of the particle, v = velocity of the particle, p = mv = momentum of the particle.

We can make the following inferences from the above relation connecting wavelength (a characteristic of the wave) And

Momentum (a characteristic of the particle) :

  1. If v = 0, then λ = ∞, it means the waves are associated with moving material particles only.
  2. The de Broglie wavelength does not depend on whether the moving particle is charged or uncharged. It means that matter waves are not electromagnetic waves because electromagnetic waves are produced from accelerated charged particles.
  3. If the mass m and the velocity v of the particle are large, the associated de Broglie wavelength becomes very small. If the momentum of the particle increases, the wavelength decreases.
  4. The wave nature and particle nature of any physical entity (matter or radiation) are mutually exclusive, i.e., if we consider the particle nature of radiation at any instant, the wave nature of radiation is to be excluded at that instant.

In 1927 C J Davisson and H. Germer of Bell Telephone, laboratories and George P Thomson of the University of Aberdeen, Scot¬ land, were able to show diffraction of electron streams and hence established experimentally the existence of matter waves

Hence, any moving stream of particle or matter exhibits interference, diffraction, and polarisation phenomena which can only be explained with wave theory.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Double Slit Experiments

The interference pattern, obtained by using a double slit type of experiment, using about 70000 moving electrons is shown in

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation de Broglie Wavelength Of Moving Electron

Let an electron of mass m move with velocity v. Its de Broglie wavelength is given by

λ = h/mv

If the kinetic energy of the electron is K, then

K = ½ mv² Or, v = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 K}{m}}\)

So, de Broglie wavelength is

λ = \(\frac{h}{m \sqrt{\frac{2 K}{m}}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m K}}\) ………………………………. (1)

Equation (1) is the expression for the de Broglie wavelength ofa moving particle in terms of its kinetic energy.

Now suppose an electron is at rest. It is accelerated through a potential difference V. The kinetic energy acquired by the electron is K = eV; e = charge of the electron.

On substituting the value of K in equation (1), the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron is given by

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m e V}}\) ……………………… (2)

Putting the values of h,e,m in ‘equation (2) we have,

λ = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times V}}\)

= \(\frac{12.27 \times 10^{-10}}{\sqrt{V}} \mathrm{~m}\)

= \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{V}}\)

Wavelength of matter-wave

Let the velocity of an electron (mass = 9.1 × 1010 cm .s1), v = 107 m. s1. de Broglie wavelength of the electron

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times 10^7}\)

= \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times 10^7}\)

= 7.3 × 10-11 cm .s1

= 0.73 A°

This wavelength is equivalent to the wavelength of X-rays.

1. Let the mass of a moving marble, m = 10 g = 0.01 kg, and its velocity, v = 10 m s-1. Then de Broglie wavelength of the marble

⇒ \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.01 \times 10}\)

= 6.63 × 10-33 cm .s1m

The value of this wavelength is too small to be measured or be observed by any known experiment Existence of such small wavelengths in electromagnetic radiation or any other real waves is still unknown to us

From the above discussions, we can infer that de Broglie’s hypothesis is of no use in the case of the macroscopic objects that we encounter in our daily lives.

The concept of matter waves is only Important In the case of particles of atomic dimensions.

Dual nature of matter class 12 notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation de Broglie Wavelength Of Moving Electron Numerical Examples

Example 1. What is the de-Broglie- wavelength-related to an electron of energy 100 eV? (Given, the mass of the electron, m =  9.1 x 10-31 kg, e = 6.63 × 10-34  J. s)
Solution:

Let the velocity of the electron be v. Its kinetic energy,

½ mv² = E

Or, m²v² = 2mE

Or, mv = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

de Broglie wavelength related to the electron,

λ = \(\frac{h}{m \nu}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 100 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}}\)

= 1.23 × 10-10 m = 1.23A°

Example 2. Calculate the momentum of a photon of frequency 5 × 1013 Hz. Given h = 6.6 × 10-34 J.s and c= 3 × 108 m.s-1
Solution:

de Broglie wavelength \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h}{p}\)

Momentum p = h/λ

Therefore, the momentum of the photon.

p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}=\frac{h f}{c}=\frac{\left(6.6 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(5 \times 10^{13}\right)}{3 \times 10^3}\)

= 1.1 × 10-28 kg.m.s-1

Example 3. The wavelength A of a photon and the de Broglie wavelength of an electron have the same value. Show that the energy of the photon \(\) kinetic energy of the electron. Here m, their usual meaning
Solution:

The energy of the photon. F. = hf = hc/λ

The kinetic energy of the electron

E’ = \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=\frac{p^2}{2 m}\)

Where , p= mv= momentum

As p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\) So, E’ = \(\frac{h^2}{2 m \lambda^2}\)

E’ = \(\frac{h^2}{2 m \lambda^2}\)

Or, E =  \(\frac{E}{E^{\prime}}=\frac{h c}{\lambda} \cdot \frac{2 m \lambda^2}{h^2}=\frac{2 \lambda m c}{h}\)

E = \(\frac{2 \lambda m c}{h}\) E

Real-Life Applications of Dual Nature Concept

Example 4. An electron and a photon have the same de Hrogilr wave¬ length λ = I0-10m. Compare the kinetic energy of the electron with the total energy of the photon
Solution:

The kinetic energy of an electron having mass m and velocity v,  K =  ½ mv²

Wavelength λ  = h/mv

Or, v = h/m λ

∴ K =½ m. \(\frac{h^2}{m^2 \lambda^2}=\frac{h^2}{2 m \lambda^2}\)

The energy of the photon of wavelength λ, E \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

∴  \(\frac{K}{E}=\frac{h^2}{2 m \lambda^2} \cdot \frac{\lambda}{h c}=\frac{h}{2 m \lambda c}\)

= \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 10^{-10} \times 3 \times 10^8}\)

= 0.012<1

Hence, the kinetic energy- of the electron is lower than the total energy of the photon

Example 5. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of an electron of kinetic energy 500 eV.
Solution:

The kinetic energy of an electron 500 eV means the electron is accelerated by the potential 500 V So, the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron

λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{500}}\)

= 0.55 A°

WBCHSE physics dual nature notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Experimental Study Of Matter-Wave

Davisson and Germer Experiment:

We physicists C J Davisson and L H Germer first established the reality of matter waves. The experiment conducted by them in the year 1927 is described below.

1. Davisson and Germer experiment:

The electrons evaporated from the heated filament (F) after coming out of the electron gun are passed through a potential difference V. Thus, they acquire a high velocity and hence increased kinetic energy.

These electrons are then directed through a narrow hole and are thus collimated into a unidirectional beam. The kinetic energy of each single electron of this beam is eV.

Arrangements are such that this beam impinges normally on a specially hewn nickel single crystal. Because of this impact, the electrons may be scattered in different directions through different angles ranging from 10° to 90°. The incident and scattered beams are generally referred to as the incident ray and scattered ray.

A collector D capable of rotating around the crystal measures the intensity of the rays scattered in different directions. What is measured in the process is the number of electrons collected per second

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Davission And Germer Experiment

2. Davisson and Germer Observation:

The intensity I obtained for the different values of the angle of scattering θ of the scattered ray is expressed using a polar graph where the scattered intensity is plotted as a function of the scattering angle.

The convention in this respect is this:

  1. The point of incidence on the crystal is taken as the origin O of the graph
  2. The direction OP opposite the direction of the incident ray PO is taken as the standard axis of the graph.

Suppose, for a stream of particles with definite energy, which is incident on the p crystal, the scattering angles are θ1, θ2, and the corresponding intensities  I1, I2…….Hence, the line joining the points is represented by the polar coordinates (I1, θ1 ), (I2, θ2 ), …, etc.

Will be the polar Q graph indicating the result of the experiment. The polar coordinates of the points A and B are (I1, θ1 ) and (I2, θ2 ); that is, I1 = OA, I2 = OB, and θ1 = ∠AOP, θ2= ∠BOP. In this figure, the line OABQ joining the points A, B… is the polar graph.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Scattering Angles

In this experiment, if the kinetic energy of the incident electrons is considerably low [as for the 40 eV electrons,  then it is observed that the intensity I corresponding to changes in the angle of scattering from 10° to 90° keeps decreasing continuously, which does not indicate any characteristic property of the electron beam.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Incident Beam And Nickel Beam

After this, Davisson and Germer noticed that when the kinetic energy of the incident electrons is gradually increased, a distinct hump appears at 44 eV at a scattering angle of about 60°. The hump becomes most prominent at 54 eV and a scattering angle of 50°. At still higher potentials, the hump decreases until it disappears completely at 68.

If the nickel crystal is compared with a diffraction grating, it is observed that if an X-ray of wavelength 1.65A is incident normally on the nickel crystal instead of the electron beam, then also, a peak representing maximum intensity will be obtained at 50°

The angle of scattering. On the other hand, when the de Broglie formula for matter wave is applied, the de Broglie wavelength of 54 eV electrons is λ =  \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{54}}\) = 1.67A°

This striking similarity of the experimental value to the theoretical value according to de Broglie’s relation demonstrates the behavior of the electron stream as a matter wave. The experiment is termed an electron diffraction experiment as well

  1. The atoms of pure solids are arranged in crystal lattices of definite shapes. If an infinitely large number, say, 1020 or. more, if such crystals are aligned in a three-dimensional array to form a large piece of matter, then the specimen is called a single crystal. For example, the cubical grains of common salt thus formed are each a single crystal.
  2. Davisson and Germer used it for their experiment comparatively. slow-moving electrons with energy varying between 30 eV and 60 eV. Later on, G.P. Thomson successfully conducted a diffraction experiment with even high-energy electron beams; electrons of energy as high as 10 keV to 50 keV. In the subsequent years, the wave nature of other elementary particles, like the proton and the neutron, has also been established experimentally

The nature of matter-wave

According to de Broglie’s hypothesis, every moving particle can be represented as a matter wave, which, obviously, therefore, has to obey certain conditions

  1. Corresponding to a moving particle, a matter wave must also be a moving wave or progressive wave.
  2. The wave velocity must be equal to the particle velocity.
  3. Because the particle has a definite position at any time, the matter wave must be such that it can indicate the position of the particle at that time.

A pure sine curve cannot represent a matter wave, which means that no proper idea can be formed about the true nature of the matter wave from such curves. Let us suppose that a progressive wave moving in the positive  x-direction is given by

Ψ = a sin (ωt – kx + δ) where a = amplitude,  ω = angular velocity, fc= propagation constant; and  δ = phase difference

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation The Nature Of Matter Wave

  1. This wave extends from x = ∞ to -∞  with no dissipation or damping anywhere along the path. J fence, It can never Indicate the Instantaneous position of the moving partly, OH If it is assumed however that the matter wave Js analogs, to the pure sine wave, then it can be shown.
  2. That the velocity ofthe de Broglie wave turns out to be greater than the speed of light in a vacuum, which is Impossible contradicting Einstein’s special theory of relativity,

Moreover, a sine wave does not exist In nature. No real wave can extend from -∞ to +∞ without any damping. This implies that what we observe in reality is a wave group. For a practical example, consider the shape of waves formed when a stone is dropped in a pond. A wave group as shown comprising just a couple of wave crests and wave troughs is formed in the water and proceeds in circles over the water’s surface.

Wave group or wave packet:

If there is a superposition of two or more sine waves of different frequencies, then the waveform changes. If any such sine waves of continuously varying frequencies are superposed, the resultant wave that is formed has a general form like the one This is what is called wave group or wave packet.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Wave Group Or Wave Packet

Characteristics of wave packets are

This too is a progressive wave moving in a definite direction, in this case, along the + x-axis.

It is a localized wave, which means that it is limited within a rather small interval. Hence, such a wave group can indicate the possible instantaneous location of a moving particle.

It can be shown analytically that the velocity of such wave groups, \(\).  It is called group velocity. Rigorous calculation shows that vg = v; that is, the group velocity is equal to the particle velocity. Thus properly constituted wave group or wave packet alone can correctly represent a matter wave.

Wave function

It has to be noted with particular care that a matter wave is neither an elastic wave like a sound wave nor an electromagnetic wave like a light wave. This is because an elastic wave is associated with the vibration of particles in an elastic medium, whereas an electromagnetic wave involves the simultaneous vibrations of the electric field and the magnetic field vectors.

In analogy, u matter wave is associated with a quantity known as wave function – Ψ. The origin and propagation ofthe matter wave are perfectly consistent with the vibrations of this Ψ – function concerning position and time.

It can be noticed that while the moving particle exists at a particular point at a particular moment of its motion, the correspond¬ ing matter wave occupies an extent of space at that moment, rather than be limited to a point.

It can be inferred from quantum mechanics that this property is an inherent property of matter waves; a wave packet is never concentrated at a single point. The probability of the particle existing at a particular point at a particular time is given by Ψ², the modulus squared off,

Photon wave

We have seen, even before discussing wave-particle duality, that electromagnetic radiation has a dual nature too; radiation is sometimes represented by waves, at other times in terms of photon beams. It is possible also to represent moving photons by a corresponding waveform as is done with a moving particle.

A single photon will naturally be represented by a wave group. The only difference here is that this (photon) wave packet must be an electromagnetic wave packet with group velocity in vacuum or air equal to the velocity of light.

WBCHSE Physics Dual Nature Notes

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Experimental Study Of Matter-Wave Numerical Examples

Example 1. Find de Broglie wavelength of the neutron at 127°C. Given, K = 1.38 × 10-23 ; h = J. mol1.K1. Plank’s constant, h = 6.626 × 10-34J.s. mass of neutron, m = 1.66 × 10-27 kg.

Kinetic energy of neutron, E = \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT

We know E = ½ mv²

Or, 2Em = m²v²

Or, mv = \(\sqrt{2 E m}=\sqrt{2 m \times \frac{3}{2} k T}=\sqrt{3 m k T}\)

de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m k T}}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{3 \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 400}}\)

= 1.264 ×  10-10m

Example 2. Under what potential difference should an electron be accelerated to obtain electron waves of A = 0.6 A f Given, the mass of the electron, m = 9.1x 10-31  kg; Planck’s constant, h = 6.62 x 10-34 J. s
Solution:

We know λ = ½mv²  = eV

∴ mv= \(\sqrt{2 m e V} \text { or, } \lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m e V}}\)

Or, λ² =  \(\frac{h^2}{2 m e V} \text { or, } V=\left(\frac{h}{\lambda}\right)^2 \cdot \frac{1}{2 m e}\)

V =  \(\left(\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34}}{0.6 \times 10^{-10}}\right)^2 \times \frac{1}{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= 418.04 V

Example 3. An a -particle and a proton are accelerated from rest through the same potential difference V. Find the ratio of Broglie wavelengths associated with them.
Solution:

The kinetic energy of a particle of mass m.

E = \(\frac{p^2}{2 m}\)

Where p = \(\sqrt{2 m E}\)

So, de Broglie wavelength, λ = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

Now, if a particle of charge q is accelerated by applying potential difference V, then

E = qV

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m q V}}\)

∴ λ ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{m q}}\) when V is constant

Hence \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}=\sqrt{\frac{m_2 \cdot q_2}{m_1 \cdot q_1}}\)

For proton and a -particle \(\frac{m_a}{m_p}=4, \frac{q_a}{q_p}\) = 2

∴ \(\frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_a}=\sqrt{\frac{m_a}{m_p} \cdot \frac{q_a}{q_p}}\)

= \(=\sqrt{4 \times 2}\)

= 2 \(\sqrt{2}\)

Hence, the required ratio 2\(\sqrt{2}\):1

Example 4. For what kinetic energy of neutron will the associated de Broglie wavelength be 1.40 x 10-10 m? The mass of a neutron is 1.675 x 10-27 kg and h = 6.63 x 10-34 J
Solution:

If m is the mass and K is the kinetic energy of the neutron, the de Broglie wavelength associated with it is given by,

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m K}}\)

Or, K = \(\frac{h^2}{2 m \lambda^2}=\frac{\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34}\right)^2}{2 \times 1.675 \times 10^{-27} \times\left(1.40 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}\)

= 6.69 × 10-21 J

Example 5. Find the wavelength of an electron having kinetic energy 10eV.(h =  6.33 × 10-34J me = 9 × 10-31 kg
Solution:

The kinetic energy of the electron,

E = ½ mv² = 10 eV = 10 × (1.6 x 10-19)J

m²v² = 2mE, or, momentum p = mv = \(\sqrt{2 m E }\)

The de Broglie wavelength of the electron,

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\left[2 \times\left(9 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(10 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)\right]^{1 / 2}}\)

= 3.9 ×  10-10 m

= 3.9 A°

Example 6. An α – particle moves In a circular path of radius  0.83 cm in the presence of a magnetic field of 0.25 Wb/m². What is the de Broglie wavelength associated with the particle? ,
Solution:

The radius of a charged particle rotating in a circular path in a magnetic field

R = \(\frac{m v}{B q}\) or, mv = RBq

The de Broglie wavelength associated with the particle,

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h}{R B q}\)

Here, R = 0.83 cm = 0.83 × 10-2 m, B = 0.25 Wb. m²

q = 2e = 2 ×1.6 × 10-19C

[Since α – particle]

λ = \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{0.83 \times 10^{-2} \times 0.25 \times 2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= 0.01 A°

WBCHSE physics dual nature notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Very Short Questions And Answers

Question 1. Below a minimum frequency of light, photoelectric emis¬ sion does not occur Is the statement true or false?
Answer: True

Question 2. Above the threshold wavelength for a metal surface, even a light of low intensity can emit photoelectrons. Is the statement true?
Answer: No

Question 3. What will be the effect on the velocity of emitted photo¬ electrons if the wavelength of incident light is gradually
Answer: The velocity of electrons will increase

Question 4. Why are alkali metals highly photo-sensitive?
Answer: Work functions of alkali metals are very low

Question 5. Express in eV the amount of kinetic energy gained by an electron when it is passed through a potential difference of
Answer: 100 eV

Question 6. The photoelectric threshold wavelength for a metal is 2100 A. If the wavelength of incident radiation is 1800 A, will there be any emission of photoelectrons?
Answer: Yes

Question 7. Which property of photoelectric particles was discovered from Hertz’s experiment?
Answer: Property of negative charge

Question 8. Which property of photoelectric particles was measured
Answer: Specific charge

Question 9. What is the relation between the stopping potential VQ and the maximum velocity vmax of photoelectrons?
Answer:

⇒ \(\left[v_{\max }=\sqrt{\frac{2 e V_0}{m}}\right]\)

Question 10. How does the kinetic energy of photoelectrons change due to an increase in the intensity of incident light?
Answer: No change

Question 11. Give an example of the production of photons by electrons.
Answer: X-ray emission

Question 12. Give an example of the production of electrons by photons.
Answer: Photoelectric effect

Question 13. If the intensity of incident radiation on a metal surface is doubled what happens to the kinetic energy of the electrons emitted?
Answer: No change in KE

Question 14. Write down the relation between threshold frequency and photoelectric work function for a metal.
Answer: \(\left[f_0=\frac{W}{h}\right]\)

Question 15. Which property of light is used to explain the characteristics of the photoelectric effect?
Answer: Particle (photon) nature

Question 16. What is the rest mass of a photon?
Answer: Zero

Question 17. The wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is X . What is the energy of a photon of this radiation?
Answer: E =  hc/λ

Question 18. The light coming from a hydrogen-filled discharge tube falls on sodium metal. The work function of sodium is 1.82 eV and the kinetic energy of the fastest photoelectron is 0.73 eV. Fine, the energy of incident light.
Answer: 2.55 eV

Question 19. In the case of electromagnetic radiation of frequency f, what is the momentum of the associated photon?
Answer: hf/c

Question 20. If photons of energy 6 eV are incident on a metallic sur¬ face, the kinetic energy of the fastest electrons becomes 4eV. What is the value of the stopping potential?
Answer: 4V

Question 21. The threshold wavelength of a metal having work function W is X . What will be the threshold wavelength of a metal having work function 2W?
Answer: λ/2

Question 22. The work function of a metal surface for electron emission is W. What will be the threshold frequency of incident radiation for photoelectric emission?
Answer: W/h

Question 23. What is the effect on the velocity of the emitted photoelectrons if the wavelength of the incident light is decreased?
Answer: Velocity will increase

Question 24. Two metals A and B have work functions 4eV and 10 eV respectively. Which metal has a higher threshold wavelength
Answer: Metal A

Question 25. Ultraviolet light is incident on two photosensitive materials having work functions W1 and W2(W1 > W2). In which case will the kinetic energy of the emitted electrons be greater? Why
Answer: For the material of work function W2

Question 26. Is it possible to bring about the interference of electrons?
Answer: Yes

Question 27. What type of wave is suitable to represent the wave associated with a moving particle?
Answer: Wave Packet

Question 28. The wavelength of a stream of charged particles accelerated by a voltage Vis A. What will be the wavelength if the voltage is increased to 4 V?
Answer: λ /2

Question 29. The de Broglie wavelength of an electron and the wave¬ length of a photon are equal and its value is A = 10-10m. Which one has higher kinetic energy?
Answer: Photon

Question 32. An electron and a proton have the same kinetic energy. Identify the particle whose de Broglie wavelength would be
Answer: Electron

Question 36. The de Broglie wavelength of a particle of kinetic energy K is A. What would be the wavelength of the particle if its kinetic energy were K/4?
Answer: 2 λ

Question 37. The de Broglie wavelength associated with an electron accelerated through a potential difference V is A. What will be its wavelength when the accelerating potential is increased to 4 V?
Answer: λ /2

Question 38. What will be the kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons if light of threshold frequency falls on a metal?
Answer: Zero

Question 39. What conclusion Is drawn from the Davisson-Germer experiment?
Answer:

The Davisson-Germer experiment proves the existence of matter waves. It can be concluded from the experiment that any stream of particles behaves as waves

Question 40. Name the phenomenon which shows the quantum nature of electromagnetic radiation.
Answer:

The phenomenon which shows the quantum nature of electromagnetic radiation is the photoelectric effect

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons depends on __________________ of light used but does not depend on the of light
Answer: Frequency, intensity

Question 2. In the case of photoelectric emission, the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons increases with an increase in the _______________ of incident light
Answer: Frequency

Question 3. Lenard concluded from his experiment that the particles emitted in the photoelectric effect are _________________
Answer: Electrons

Question 4. In the case of photoelectric emission, the maximum kinetic energy of emitted electrons depends linearly on the _________________ of incident radiation
Answer: Frequency

Question 5. Davison and Germer experimentally demonstrated the existence of _____________________ waves
Answer: Matter

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Assertion Type

Direction: These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements,

  1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is the correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is false.
  4. Statement 1 Is false, and statement 3 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: Any light wave having a frequency less than 4.8 × 1014 Hz cannot emit photoelectrons from a metal surface having work function 2.0 eV.

Statement 2:  If the work function of a metal is W0 (in eV), then the maximum wavelength (in A°) of the light capable of initiating a photoelectric effect in the metal is \(\lambda_{\max }=\frac{12400}{W_0} \)

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is the correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 2.

Statement 1: The energy of the associated photon max becomes half when the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave is doubled.

Statement 2: Momentum of a photon

= \(\frac{\text { energy of the photon }}{\text { velocity of light }}\)

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, and statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 3.

Statement 1: In the photoelectric effect the value of stopping potential is not at all dependent on the wavelength of the light

Statement 2: The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectron and stopping potential are proportional to each other.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 3 is true.

Question 4.

Statement 1: The maximum surface velocity does not of increase the photo electron even if the intensity of the incident electromagnetic wave is increased.

Statement 2: Einstein’s photoelectric equation

½ mv²max = hf – W0

Where the symbols have their usual meaning

Answer: 1. 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is the correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 5.

Statement 1: The stopping potential becomes double when the frequency of the incident radiation is doubled.

Statement 2: The work function of the metal and the threshold frequency of the photoelectric effect are proportional to each other.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 3 is true.

Question 6.

Statement 1: If the kinetic energy of particles with different masses is the same, then the de Broglie wavelength ofthe particles is inversely proportional to their mass.

Statement 2: The momentum of moving particles is inversely proportional to their de Broglie wavelengths.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 3 is true.

Question 7.

Statement 1: If a stationary electron is accelerated with a potential difference of IV, its de Broglie wavelength becomes 12.27 Å approximately.

Statement 2: The relation between the de Broglie length A and the accelerating potential V of an electron is given by λ  = \(\frac{12.27}{V}\) Å

Answer: 3. Statement 1 Is true, and statement 2 Is false.

Question 8.

Statement 1: A moving particle is represented by a progressive wave group.

Statement 2: A pure sinusoidal wave cannot represent the instantaneous velocity or position of a moving particle.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is the correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 9.

Statement 1: The wavelength of 100 eV photon is 124 Å.

Statement 2: The energy of a photon of wavelength λ in Å is

E = \(\frac{12400}{\lambda}\) eV

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 Is the correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 10.

Statement 1: A proton, a neutron, and an a -particle are accelerated by the same potential difference. Their velocities will be in the ratio of 1: 1: √2.

Statement 2: Kinetic energy, E = qV =½mv²

Answer: 4. Statement 1 Is false, and statement 3 is true.

WBCHSE physics dual nature notes 

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Match The Columns

Question 1. Light of fixed intensity is incident on a metal surface.’ Match the columns in case of the resulting photoelectric effect

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Photoelectric Effect

Answer: 1-B, 2 – C, 3-D, 4-A

Question 2.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Photoelectric Effect.

Answer: 1-A, 2-C, 3-D, 4-B

Question 3. Several stationary charged particles are accelerated with appropriate potential differences so that their de Broglie wavelengths are the same

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation A Number Of Stationary Charged Particles

Answer: 1-B, 2-D, 3-A, 4-C

Question 4. The work function and threshold frequency of photoelecj trie emission of a metal surface are WQ and f respectively. Light of frequency/ is incident on the surface. The mass and charge of the electron are m and e respectively

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Function And Threshold Frequency

Answer: 1-B, 2-D, 3-C, 4-A